Home

Control-M Workload Automation User Guide 8.0.00.700

1. A projection can provide some of the following additional information 199 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job is waiting for a quantitative resource Job is waiting for a condition Job waiting for confirmation If the projection is of a job related to a service you can do a projection from a Business Service Analysis Viewpoint to view the following information Job status information if the job is in warning state if the job already ran and the job status is either Job ended too quickly or Job ran too late as described in Service Status Details on page 213 Job is problematic if the job failed or the job causes the service to be late as described in Analyzing problematic jobs on page 212 You can apply a projection as described in Applying a projection on page 200 In the Projection window and Service Monitor the word Simulation Mode is added to indicate that the impact of the What lfs is in effect Applying a projection This procedure describes how to apply a projections which enables you to view what has affected the running time of a job gt To apply a projection 1 Inthe Monitoring domain select a job 2 In the Viewpoint tab click iascia The Projection lt job name gt window appears and the status appears in the right side 3 To view available status information that does not appear click in one or more of the following e Missing conditions e Mis
2. 2 Click More 3 In the Variables area click 4 Type the Name and Value of the parameter as described in the User Defined Variables section A User defined parameter is added to the J ob definition Example Creating a Control M Rule based calendar This example describes how to schedule a job on the last day of the month if that day falls on a workday Monday Friday If the last day is a weekend shift the scheduling to the closest preceding workday gt To create a Control M Rule based calendar 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Calendars 2 From the Calendar menu select F New gt Rule Based Calendar The calendar properties pane appears on the right 3 Do the following a In the Calendar Name field type the name of the calendar b From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server where the calendar is synchronized 80 Control M Workload Automation User Guide o o NQARA 10 11 From the Schedule drop down list select Month Days In the drop down list select Days from End of Month and select 1 L1 From Limitations select Mon Tue Wed Thur and Fri If you want to Order on specific months select the appropriate month To check the Calendar click View Schedule In the Confirmation Calendar area from the Calendar drop down list select the calendar If the last day is a weekend and not a working day in the Confirmation calendar then from the If
3. 2 Do the following a From the Source Property drop down list select the parameter you want to use b In the Fixed Text field type the text you want to use c From the Target Property drop down list select the parameter you want to use 3 To add more values select the option you want and click The additional value appears t 4 To change the order of the condition format pattern click to move an option up or to move an option down 5 To create a copy of an option click 6 To delete an option click X The Condition Format is created 252 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Site standards rules editor parameters The following table lists the Site standards rules editor parameters Applied to Applies job parameter rules to specific job types in the same Site Standard Job Name applied to OS job type Default Value Defines a default value for a folder job parameter Indicates that the parameter is mandatory Possible values Defines more than one value that a Control M Workload Change Manager web user and Control M Workload Automation scheduler can use Any one of these options is valid You cannot define pattern parts if you define possible values If you define other rules like length or character restrictions the possible values have to comply with these rules Pattern Parts Indicates that a parameter is composed of a pattern Business parameters on page 247 Indicates that a busi
4. Click In the Properties pane select the Prerequisites tab From the Quantitative Resources list select the quantitative resource to copy Click BY The quantitative resource is copied and appears in quantitative resources list Deleting a quantitative resource This procedure describes how to delete a quantitative resource for a job which enables you to release a quantitative resource Before you begin Ensure that no jobs are using or requesting the quantitative resource gt gt O NM gt To delete a quantitative resource In the Workspace select the job Click In the Properties pane select the Prerequisites tab From the Quantitative Resources list select the quantitative resource to delete Click 7 The quantitative resource is deleted 174 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job actions The following are the different actions that you can define for Control M to perform based on various job run events such as conditions and job status Out Conditions Conditions that are added or deleted to the Conditions table when job ends OK for a predecessor job For more information see Out Conditions on page 175 Notifications Notifications that are sent to Alerts Window Control M Server log file User Console or any defined location the Shout destination management in response to problems or integrating with other external monitoring applications You can write the message and set t
5. You can search for job and folders and then update or remove any of the job processing definition and folder fields as described in Finding jobs on page 58 This enables you to do the following Search for job processing definition and folders with various values in any field including external application fields and list fields such as Actions Update add or remove any of the job processing definition and folders fields After you have created a search you can save it and then load it as described in Saving and loading a preset search on page 59 57 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Finding jobs This procedure enables you to find jobs based on fields and values in jobs and folders gt 1 al To find jobs In a Control M Workload Automation Workspace select The Find fields appear at the top of the Map view For a Simple Find do the following a In the Find field type the text of the item you want to find b Select zand select the fields to search and click OK c To select which entities to search in the Search In field select All Entities or select a status from the drop down list This option is only available in the Monitoring domain For an Advanced Find do the following a Click KASANGA The Advanced Find dialog box appears b Customize the filter as described in Setting up a filter on page 58 Click LEd The results of the search appear in the Search results
6. gt To release a job 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the job you want to release 3 From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Free A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The job is released Running a job now This procedure describes how to run a job now which enables you to override all prerequisites of the job for the current run skip the job or select specific submission criteria gt Toruna job now 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the job you want to run now 3 From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Run Now 4 Torun the job and override all prerequisites of the job do the following a Select Run Now b In the Confirmation message click Yes The job is submitted 5 To skip the job and continue the flow that is running do the following a Select Skip J ob b In the Confirmation message click Yes The running flow runs without the submitting the job 6 To set specific bypass submission criteria do the following a Select Select Bypass Options b Inthe Run Now J ob dialog box select the specific submission criteria to bypass as described Run Now Bypass options on page 192 The Run as Dummy J ob field defines how to run the job It is actually bypassing the defined command or script that is defined in the What area In the Run Now J ob dialog box click Ok d In the Conf
7. Control M Workload Automation User Guide Calendar management The Calendar Manager is a tool that enables you to create pre defined calendars based on specific scheduling criteria that are used to define scheduling in a job definition You can create a pre defined calendar based on one or more of the following calendar types Regular calendars Enables you to create a pre defined calendar based on the days of the month and or the days of the week as described in Creating a regular or relative calendar on page 262 Relative calendars Control M for z OS only Enables you to schedule dates even if they are not scheduled in a calendar as described in Creating a regular or relative calendar on page 262 Ina Relative calendar the specified date has or to indicate how to handle when the marked date is scheduled or not as one follows e Scheduled Schedule the date in the relative calendar e Not scheduled Schedule the closest next date or the closest previous date You can use Relative calendars to combine calendars through the Control M OABLCAL utility as described in Contro M for z OS User Guide Periodic calendars Enables you to create a pre defined calendar based on different calendar periods that you define Periods can be nonconsecutive of varying length and overlapping as described in Creating a periodic calendar on page 263 Rule based Calendars Enables you to create a pre defined calendar that is
8. In the Name field type a name for the new Site standard Do one or all of the following e Create Folder job parameters on page 246 rules as described in Creating folder job parameter rules on page 250 e Create Business parameters on page 247 as described in Creating business parameters on page 251 e Create Internal rules on page 248 as described in Creating internal rules on page 251 5 Click The Site standard is created Creating folder job parameter rules This procedure describes how to create a folder job parameter rule which enables you set rules and restrictions to specific Control M folder job parameters Before you begin Ensure that you have completed Creating a Site standard on page 250 gt To create folder job parameter rules 1 In the Site standard in the Folder job parameters section click The rules editor pane appears on the right From the Name drop down list select the Control M parameter Define the rules as described in Site standards rules editor parameters on page 253 4 Click The folder job parameter rules are created 250 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Creating business parameters This procedure describes how to create a Business parameter rule For more information on Business parameters functionality see Business parameters on page 247 Before you begin Ensure that you have completed Creating a Site standard on page 250 gt To create b
9. Name File Member Name x Default Value Possible Values Pattern Parts Pattern Parts gt 0 XS Internal Rule Not alowed c Not alowed characters After this rule is defined in the Site standard and the Site standard is assigned to the folder the rule is applied The Control M Workload Change Manager web user and the Control M Workload Automation scheduler modifying the folder with that Site standard will have to comply with the rule you defined If they do not comply with the rule a warning error appears They can ignore or fix the warning error depending on the enforcement policy you set as described in Enforcing validations on page 257 For more information on how to define internal rules see Creating a Site standard on page 250 Condition Format In the Site Standard tool you can specify a default condition name format that is used by the Workload Change Manager web user and the Control M Workload Automation scheduler Once the condition format is applied in the Site Standard definitions the new default format will override the condition format set by the user in Planning settings on page 24 The Condition Format consists of the following three parts e Source property Defines the source job attribute to use as part of the condition name e Fixed text Defines the free text that connects between the source and target properties e Target property Defines the target job attr
10. Run Information Order ID ons Status Wat Host Network Overview d Order Date 30 Dec 12 4 ee AS Started At tame Hemname mee 5 folderwithRbcs ctmB00o0rca 1 Number of Ru 0 Additional Information Total Smart Folders 1 Total Jobs 8 The following table describes the areas in the History domain in Control M Workload Automation 1 Ribbon Displays menus that enable you work in the domain find the tools related to the domain customize the view and analyze your flow 2 Main pane Displays the jobs and folders in the domain You can display the area as a Map or List Lists the entities according to the defined hierarchy in the View tab Domain selector Lists the various functional areas in the application where you can plan monitor view history forecast use tools and view Newsfeed 16 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Results pane Displays results such as results of Find and Validation report Show Changes results and displays the Network Overview The thumbnail version of the flow diagram currently displayed in the Main pane with the following color indications when the Main pane is set to Map Green new Blue modified Grey unchanged Yellow Control M Server Application and Sub Application e Status bar Displays information about the flow diagram Properties pane Displays the properties of the selected entity 17 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Forecast domain The fo
11. Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SMART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders Read only Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters Specifies that job submission details be broadcast to all agents within a defined Host Group All available agents in the Host Group run an identical job and each such job has a unique Order ID All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Defines a description related to the job and is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the D
12. Enables you to automatically update the condition name when the source and or target property is changed If not selected the condition name is not updated automatically Condition Format Defines the default condition format used when you create job dependencies by dragging between job hosts in Control M Workload Automation flow diagram Select one of the following conditions J ob Folder Name TO Target ob J ob Folder Name J ob Folder Name ENDED OK File Member Name ENDED OK File Member Name TO Target ob File Member Name Automatically inherit Deleted J ob s conditions Enables you to automatically inherit a deleted job s conditions By selecting the check box a connection continues between a deleted job s predecessor and successor jobs It removes the dependency between the deleted job and its successor by removing the Out condition of the deleted job and the In condition of the successor job that created the dependency This option only works if you delete one job at a time and in a checked out workspace If you delete multiple jobs in a single delete action the connection is lost regardless of the setting Counter Defines the number of jobs You can set the counter to start from a minimum number of jobs 25 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Monitoring settings This table describes the Monitoring options for customizing your settings in the Control M Workload Automation client Startup Auto
13. Service Name Service must complete Service Priority Actions Job Run Time Tolerance Service Name ogical name from a user or business perspective for the critical service BMC recommends that the service name be unique Service must complete Defines the time the critical service must be completed to be considered on time The time can be specified either by a specific hour and or day or on a specific hour and minute after the order time This parameter consists of the following sub parameters By Number of days Defines by what time in HH MM and in how many days relative to the Order date the service must complete In Number of hours and number of minutes after Defines in how many hours and minutes the service must complete 91 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Service Priority Job Run Time Tolerance Control M Server Defines the priority level of this service from a user or business perspective Defines the automatic interventions such as rerunning a job displaying the critical service in BMC Service Impact Manager or extending the service due time The action is performed if the job finished too quickly there is a job failure on service path or the service finished late or too quickly When Defines the BIM event that triggers the action as described in BIM Events on page 94 Do Defines the action as described in Batch Impact Manager Service Actions Defines the type of d
14. as described in Customizing your default settings in the Workload Automation client on page 24 The simulated color background is displayed only if the Business Services What If Scenario window contains What Ifs If all What Ifs are deleted or disabled the background color reverts back to the active background color Adding a What if event This procedure describes how to add a What If event to a scenario which enables you to simulate actions that can resolve service problems and analyze their impact on the active jobs before actually executing them gt To add a What if event 1 From the Monitoring domain access the Business Services Viewpoint as described in Accessing the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint on page 197 2 In the Business Services tab in the right pane click What I f Scenario The What If Scenarios icons appear 3 Click and select the type of What If The specific What If lt type gt dialog box appears as described in What If scenario options on page 207 4 Set the What If fields as described in What If scenario options on page 207 The What If appears and is enabled and the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint background color changes to blue to indicate that this is in simulation mode To analyze the service see Service analysis on page 202 To perform actions on the jobs in the Viewpoint click the Viewpoint tab and preform the action as described in Intervention actions on pag
15. automatic update of the status of resources in Active J obs Database in Quantitative Resources windows You can set the automatic update according to the number of seconds Refresh control resource list interval seconds Enables automatic update of the status of resources in Active J obs Database in control Resources windows You can set the automatic update according to the number of seconds Refresh condition list interval seconds Enables automatic update of the status of resources in Active obs Database in condition Resources windows You can set the automatic update according to the number of seconds Action Report Keep last lt n gt lines Defines the maximum number of job and folder actions displayed in the Action Report window If more than the specified number of messages are issued the oldest messages are removed from the window You can select any number from 10 to 999 The default is 200 Reconnection If the connection to Control M Workload Automation client is lost Control M EM Attempts attempts to reconnect to the first server in a user defined list of alternative servers and continues to reconnect to the next available server You can set a number of defaults as follows Automatically reconnect for GUI server Enables Control M EM to reconnect to Control M Workload Automation client automatically without user intervention automatic mode You can monitor and intervene where necessary while the connection is bei
16. do the following a Click Rerun using the following interval sequence 153 Control M Workload Automation User Guide b Click c Set Unit and the Interval Length d Repeat step b as necessary e In the All Intervals are from J ob s field select Start End or Target 6 To set Specific Times do the following a Click Run at b Click c Set the Time d Repeat step c as necessary e Set the Tolerance Minutes field 7 Click OK The Rerun settings appear in the box below the Cyclic field 154 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Scheduling parameters The following table describes the fields used to create scheduling for a job Schedule on page 157 View Schedule Time Settings From Time To Time Must End Rerun Settings Cyclic Maximum reruns Rerun Member Defines the Scheduling options for the Schedule field in the Scheduling tab of the Properties pane Defines the button to click to view the schedule graphically Defines an area in the Scheduling tab of the Properties pane where the time frame of the job s start running time is defined This includes From Time To Time and Must End Sets time limits for submitting the job For z OS jobs includes the days Sets time limits for submitting the job You can select one of the following options Time Enables you to sets the time limits for submitting the jobs For z OS jobs includes the days End of day Enables
17. estimates how jobs will run on specific days You can use the util utility to import and export history and forecast information For more information see util What do you want to do Navigate in the Forecast You can determine the likely impact of potential changes to domain on page 18 the system View Schedule If you have Control M Forecast Add on installed you can view the schedule plan for a J ob SMART Folder Rule based Calendar for the following entities Job Enables you to view the schedule of a job definition Calendar Enables you to view the schedule for a calendar definition SMART Folder Enables you to view the schedule of a SMART Folder Definition Folder Manager Enables you to view the schedule of a SMART Folder from the Folder Manager Define a Specific User Daily You can add a specific user daily to a folder and then specify job on page 225 the order time Order time This enables large sites to balance their daily jobs throughout the day Revise job run time on page You can use Forecast BIM rules as exceptions to revise the job 228 run time that is used for job calculation Simulate your job flow on You can simulate your job flow for a specific day by setting up page 224 a Forecast Workspace create What If scenarios and analyze the jobs and services 223 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Create a What if scenario on Examine the effects of potential changes to the scheduli
18. the Documentation depends on whether the type is File or URL Fora file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved Defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved 98 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Control M Report job parameters The following table describes the General parameters for an Control M Report job Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on the platform for the job run J obs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as post processing actions Value Control M Report Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow Enables you to run jobs of job types other than Dummy as dummy jobs Control M Report Defines the following parameters Attributes Details Kinas User Password Password file Sever Host emreportcli Path Template Template path Output to Output to file Output file type and
19. window the Alerts Monitor Properties pane Displays the properties of the selected entity Reconnection Displays the status of the application to connect to the server 13 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Monitoring domain The following figure shows a Viewpoint in the Monitoring domain Log Belongs To aA Statens Documentation Status M comoaet 3 compare General W conferfolser ENOT Folder Type SMART Folder e M confera a P confenpob y Teee Description w confrrrfokter A Folder Name confarefoider N an pO Durrny_sobei2111221 h S folderfoidert D yobjodr 4 D sotjops o 1s anan W fokterfoder OS_Job scrots2 sverest Run Information Order 00091 M setes Status Ended Not OK D meesyod3 Order Date 7 3 2012 D srtesyobs Started At 07 03 2012 15 57 30 C setesyods A Ended At 07 03 2012 15 57 51 e svtesjod I Number of Runs mter D srtesyods The following table describes the areas in the Monitoring domain in Control M Workload Automation Ribbon Displays menus that enable you work in the domain find the tools related to the domain customize the view and analyze your flow Lists the entities according to the defined hierarchy in the View tab Domain selector Lists the various functional areas in the application where you can plan monitor view history forecast use tools and view Newsfeed 2 Main pane Displays the jobs and folders in the d
20. 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Templates The Template Manager appears Select the template that want to edit ad click f Edit the fields that you want to change and click Save Template 260 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Copying a template This procedure describes how to copy a template from the Template manager which enables you to create another template without having to type and select the required criteria multiple times This option is only available after you have created at least one template You cannot duplicate pre defined templates gt 1 To copy a template From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Templates The Template Manager appears Select the template that want to copy From the Templates menu select Duplicate In the Name field type a different name for the template and click Save Template The Templates properties pane appears on the right Edit the template as needed Click Save Template Deleting a template This procedure describes how to delete a template from the Template manager After the template is deleted it will not appear in the Template Manager or the J obs Palette gt 1 To delete a template From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Templates The Template Manager appears Select the template that you want to delete and click Delete A confirmation message appears Click Yes The template is deleted 261
21. 276 and then click OK Orderable parameters can be used to send variable parameters to the SMART Folder or job of the service when a Service is ordered by a Control M Self Service user Click Finish The service definition is created and added to the Service Definition Manager Editing a service definition This procedure describes how to edit a service definition Before You Begin Successful completion of Logging in to Control M Workload Automation on page 8 gt 1 To edit a service definition From the Tools domain select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears Select the service definition that you want to edit and click Properties The Service Definition window appears Edit the required fields in the General window Selection window and or the Orderable Parameters window as described in Creating a service definition on page 272 273 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 4 Click OK Copying a service definition This procedure describes how to copy a service definition in the Service Definition Manager so you can use it as a template Before You Begin Successful completion of Logging in to Control M Workload Automation on page 8 gt To copy a service definition 1 From the Tools domain select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select the service definition that you want to copy and click Duplicate The Service D
22. Applies to Service Assumptions and Forecast BIM Rules Folder Lib Name of the library that contains the job s folder Calendar Details of the Control M and calendar to be used to schedule the job Period Name of one or more periods for this exception definition which can be selected from a list Special month rules are not supported Adding a What If event from a Forecast Workspace This procedure describes how to add a What If to a scenario which enables you to simulate actions that can resolve service problems and analyze their impact on the active jobs before actually executing them gt To add a What If event from a Forecast Workspace 1 From the Forecast domain access a Forecast Workspace as described in Setting up a Forecast Workspace on page 224 2 Inthe Forecast tab in the right pane click What If Scenario The What If Scenarios icons appear 3 Click and select the type of What If as described in What If scenario options on page 207 The specific What If lt type gt dialog box appears 4 Set the What If fields as described in What If scenario options on page 207 The What If appears in the What If Scenario section 5 To view the effects of the enabled What If Scenarios section do the following a In the Forecast tab click the Forecast section 235 Control M Workload Automation User Guide b Click the Business Services section The effects of the What If event appear in the flow diagra
23. Automation User Guide Allocating a control resource on page 172 Copying a control resource on page 172 Deleting a control resource on page 172 Allocating a control resource This procedure describes how to allocate a control resource for a job which enables you to specify the type of control the job needs gt 1 2 3 4 To allocate a control resource In the Workspace select the job Click Select the Prerequisites tab In the Control Resources section click A new row is added to the Control Resources list In Control Resources do one or more of the following e Inthe Resource Name field type a name for the control resource e From the Type drop down list select either Shared or Exclusive e z OS From the On Fail drop down list select either Release or keep The control resource is allocated For more information see Control Resources Copying a control resource This procedure describes how to copy a control resource for a job which enables you to create a new control resource from an existing one gt gt O No gt To copy a control resource In the Workspace select the job Click In the properties pane select the Prerequisites tab From the Control Resources list select the control resource to copy Click BY The control resource is copied and appears in Control Resources list Deleting a control resource This procedure describes how to delete a control resource fo
24. Automation User Guide a View the Message in the Message column b Click Cancel c Fix the error in the XML file d Import the file again by repeating steps 1 5 until no errors appear 6 If there are one or more conflicts such as an unknown Control M Server in the Resolution column resolve each conflict by selecting one of the following from the drop down list and following the on screen instructions e Unresolved Conflict e Don t import e Use temporary Control M Server e Assign existing Control M Server If you selected Use temporary Control M Server or Assign existing Control M Server in the Version column select the Control M Server from the drop down menu 7 After you resolve all conflicts click Continue The jobs defined in the import file are loaded into the XML file and appear as a Workspace window and the XML filename appears as the name of theWorkspace 8 Edit jobs and folders as described in J ob definition on page 73 The functionality in the Workspace differs from the regular Workspace as described in J ob and Folder File Editing Tool on page 180 9 Click Save Save works as Save as and you can change the name of the XML file and browse to a location to save the XML file 10 Go to Importing jobs to a Workspace on page 51 to import the saved XML file to a Workspace in any environment Ordering jobs This procedure describes how to manually order jobs and folders from the Planning and Mo
25. Conditions list select the In Condition to delete 5 Click 7 The In Condition is deleted 168 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job dependencies Job dependencies defines how jobs are connected A job is dependent on another job if it is defined to run only after the successful completion of another job For more information on dependencies see the following Connecting jobs from the same Control M Server on page 169 You can connect jobs from the same Control M Server by clicking and dragging from one host to another in the flow diagram Connecting jobs from different Control M Servers on page 170 You can also define global prerequisites to establish job dependencies across different Control M Servers by defining condition name prefixes that indicate that a condition is global as described in Creating a Global Conditions Prefix on page 269 Creating an In Condition on page 167 You can set an In Condition on page 167 which establishes dependencies between jobs using logical operators such as And Or and parentheses as in following e Ifa job in a critical service is dependent on two jobs connected using the And operator the time necessary for both jobs to complete determines when the critical service completes meaning the longest possible time for both jobs e Ifa job in a critical service is dependent on two jobs connected using the Or operator the time necessary for on y one of the two jobs to comp
26. Control M Forecast installed you can view the schedule graphically to ensure that the scheduling criteria is set according to your requirements Scheduling a job folder This procedure describes how to schedule a job which enables jobs that are in Production to run on their order date if all other prerequisites are met Before you begin Ensure that you open the Workspace that holds the job you want to schedule as described in Workspace management on page 239 gt To schedule a job folder 1 In the Workspace select the job Click or click the job Select the Scheduling tab The Scheduling parameters appear From the Schedule drop down list select a scheduling type as described in Scheduling options on page 157 In the Time Settings area set From Time and To Time as described in From Time To Time In the Time Settings area set From Time and To Time as described in From Time To Time 7 To set the job to rerun from the Rerun Settings select Cyclic The Rerun setting appears in the box below the Cyclic checkbox 8 To change the cyclic settings see Setting Cyclic jobs on page 153 Set the relevant parameters as described in Scheduling parameters on page 155 150 Control M Workload Automation User Guide You have scheduled your job or folder You can click View Schedule at any time if you have the Control M Forecast Add on For more information about RBC lists and Excluded RBC lists see Rul
27. Delete an In Condition on page 168 You can set job dependencies on page 169 for jobs in the same Control M Servers or for jobs in different Control M servers Connecting jobs from different Control M Servers on page 170 You can also define global prerequisites to establish job dependencies across different Control M Servers by defining condition name prefixes that indicate that a condition is global Connecting jobs from the same Control M Server on page 169 You can define job dependencies between jobs of the same Control M Server as described in EXAMPLE A Job X has 3 In Conditions defined on an Order Date A B and C Job X starts running only if In Conditions A B and C on the Order Date are in the Active Conditions list After Job X Ends OK Creating an In Condition This procedure describes how to create an In Condition for a job which enables you to establish the requirement that the condition must exist in the Active Conditions list before the job can run Before you begin Successful completion of the following Open the Workspace that holds the jobs with the intended In Condition For more information see Workspace management on page 239 You must have a Workspace with at least two jobs to create an In Condition To create an In Condition In the Workspace select the job Click Select the Prerequisites tab eo n gt y 167 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 4 Inthe In Conditi
28. Different jobs can have the same values for many parameters To make the process of defining jobs easier you can define the common values in a template and use the template to place those values into the job processing definitions Templates can be useful whether you are creating job processing definitions one at a time or creating large numbers of job processing definitions all at the same time You can also define SMART Folder templates which can be used for creating SMART Folders and for defining jobs within the SMART Folder and you can also apply the SMART Folder template to a specific job or folder The following procedures describe how to create copy and delete templates from the Template manager Creating a job template on page 258 Inserting functions into a template on page 259 Copying a template on page 261 Deleting a template on page 261 Creating a job template This procedure describes how to create a job template which enables you to define the common values in a template and use the template to place those values into the job processing definitions Templates can be useful whether you are creating job processing definitions one at a time or creating large numbers of job processing definitions all at the same time gt To create a job template 1 From the Planning domain select a job that you want to use as a template 2 In the Workspace group select A 258 Control M Workload Automation User
29. File or URL Fora file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved Defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database Determines whether the z OS job is an Emergency job 90 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Batch Impact Manager job parameters The following table describes the General parameters for a Batch Impact Manager job Job Type Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on the platform for the job run J obs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as post processing actions Value Batch Impact Manager Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow What Defines one or more parameters which determines what the job runs Determines the service name the following service parameters that are relevant for creating a service
30. For all jobs meeting the following criteria Control M Name of the Control M whose jobs will be included in this exception definition i Name of the application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Sub Application Name of the Sub Application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Name of the job that is included in this exception definition Name of the member name for z OS that is included in this exception definition Name of the member library for z OS whose jobs is included in this exception definition organized Calendar details click Advanced Applies to Service Assumption Application Host ID Calendar Details of the Control M and calendar to be used to schedule the job Period Name of one or more periods for this exception definition which can be selected from a list Special month rules are not supported 211 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Service Log parameters The following table describes the activity parameters of the service Date and Time Shows the timestamp of the service activity From Status Shows the previous status of the service To Status Shows the current status of the service Information Status Determines if jobs are displayed depending on the check box selection If you select the check mark then show jobs with information status Problematic J obs Shows the ID number and the Job name of the problematic jobs Analyzing problematic job
31. From the File menu select Attach to Main Window The Workspace or Viewpoint appears in the Main window 295 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Pattern matching strings The following table describes the pattern matching strings that can be used to search for values in any Control M application If you use special characters such as asterisk as a literal part of the object name for example glo job1_started and when you filter you want to include only these objects for example you do not want to include glo job1_started specify before the special character in the filter prefix for example glo Otherwise objects without the special character for example glo job1_started will also be included Wherever possible try to avoid defining object names with special characters as literals Asterisk Denotes any number of characters including no characters This can be inserted in place of a string or in the middle of the pattern matching string in the place of any number of characters If one or more of the filter criteria fields is not needed it is more efficient to leave the field blank than to use the character However at least one filter field must contain a value Question Mark or Period Denotes any single character This can be inserted in place of any number of characters Exclamation Denotes all possibilities that do not match the pattern that immediately follows the character This can be speci
32. Guide 3 In the Template Name field type a name for the template and click OK The template appears in the Template Manager Inserting functions into a template This procedure describes how to insert functions into a job template that get resolved when the template is used to create job processing definitions When using a template to create many jobs beginning with the same name you can add a counter function after the name prefix in the template s Job Name field to ensure that each job is created with a unique name gt To insert functions into a template 1 Create a job template as described in Creating a job template on page 258 2 For each field that you want insert a function type the name of the function as described in Template functions on page 260 a b c d To use the value from another field type Field Name To insert a counter type Counter To insert a substring type Substr To add or subtract a value to a numeric function type or the source of the value and the quantity to add or subtract The template requires the following values to jobs along with other values not included in the example e Ajob name of APXYn where n is incremented by 1 e A file name of jobname bat In the following template fields define the following indicated values and functions e Inthe Job Name field APXY Counter e Inthe File Name field Job Name bat 259 Control M Work
33. If you want to make the calendar available for scheduling select the calendar and click Check in The calendar synchronizes in the Definitions database If your synchronization setting is set to No Synchronization see Configuring Control M Server synchronization you can upload the calendar to Control M Server by clicking Upload drop down list and selecting Upload to upload calendar to Control M Server or Force Upload same as Upload but override changes Creating a Control M Rule based Calendar This procedure describes how to create a Control M Rule based calendar which is a pre defined calendar that is based on specific scheduling rules gt 1 2 To create a Control M Rule based Calendar From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Calendars From the Calendar menu select New gt Rule Based Calendar The calendar properties pane appears on the right Do the following e Inthe Calendar Name field type the name of the calendar e From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server where the calendar is synchronized From the Schedule drop down list select one of the scheduling options as described in Scheduling options on page 157 Click More For each field type or select the required value as described in Scheduling parameters on page 155 Click OK The Rule Based calendar is created and appears in the calendar table If you want to make the calendar available for scheduling s
34. Info data appears 3 Click Enhanced Path The oldest Predecessor job that did not complete or did not complete OK appears as links 4 Click Select all jobs All the predecessor jobs that did not complete or did not complete OK appear and are selected in the Tree View and the Main pane 5 To view each job click the link The job is selected and the Analysis pane appears Analyzing Output of an active job This procedure describes how to view Output of a job Before you begin Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 gt To analyze Output of an active job 1 Inthe Viewpoint click on the job you want to view The properties of the job are displayed in the J ob Analysis pane on the right 2 Click Output The Output information appear Select a date to view Output from the list or click Show Latest to view the latest Output In the Find field type a word or phrase to search for in the Output From the Font size list select a font size for the Output text 6 To set the Output text to bold click BY Analyzing what service the job belongs to This procedure describes how to view what service the job belongs to which enables you to view to which service and Workload Policy the job belongs Before you begin Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 187 Control M Workload Automation User Guide gt To analyze what service the job belongs to 1 Inthe Viewpo
35. M Workload Automation User Guide c To include only conditions defined in a specific Control M Server select the I gnore global Conditions field 8 Click Open The Forecast Workspace opens Filtering the Forecast Workspace This procedure describes how to change the jobs and folders that are displayed without removing the data this enables you to control what you view in the Forecast Workspace gt To filter a Forecast Workspace 1 Inthe Forecast domain click The Filter dialog box appears 2 Enter the values of the parameters as described in Filter parameters on page 42 3 Click Done The Forecast Workspace displays the jobs that you would like to view without removing them from the Workspace Updating a Forecast Workspace filter This procedure describes how to update a Forecast Workspace filter Before you begin Ensure you have completed Setting up a Forecast Workspace on page 224 gt To update a Forecast Workspace filter 1 Inthe Forecast domain click The Update Filter dialog box appears 2 Enter the values of the parameters as described in Setting up a Forecast Workspace on page 224 The Forecast Workspace displays the jobs that you would like to view without removing them from the Workspace Defining a Specific User Daily job This procedure describes how to define a Specific User Daily job which enables you to add a specific user daily defined in folder and specify the Order time 2
36. OS job the Doc File is the name of the file where the job Documentation is saved Priority Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database 149 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job scheduling You can schedule a job to enable the job to be eligible for being run when the job is in Production as long as the other prerequisites are met You can schedule jobs sub folders and SMART folders as described in the following topics Scheduling a job folder on page 150 The scheduling settings of the folder that contains the job contributes to the resulting schedule of the job In addition if the parent folder is a SMART folder the jobs and sub folders contained in the SMART folder are affected by the relationship that you define For example in Advanced Scheduling you have an option to change the OR to an AND relationship between the job in the SMART folder scheduling for a particular day Specific Rule based calendar scheduling on page 151 Enables you to schedule jobs sub folders and SMART folders based on adding folder Rule based Calendars folder RBC and Control M Rule based Calendar Control M RBC For more information see Rule based Calendar and Excluded Rule based Calendar lists on page 151 Setting Cyclic jobs on page 153 You can also set rerun definitions for cyclic jobs For more information about cyclic jobs see Cyclic jobs on page 153 View Schedule If you have BMC
37. Order on Months on page 163 Determines the months that can be scheduled for processing 160 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Relative Calendar days from Defines the relative calendar days from start end of month for start end of Month scheduling Calendar The job is scheduled according to the scheduling criteria of the selected Calendar as described in Calendar management on page 262 Order only on calendar days Defines the days from beginning of the month or from the end of month Dn or Ln Order on Calendar days except Defines the calendar days from beginning of month or from end of month Dn or Ln Periods Enables you to select different periods in a Periodic Calendar and the calendar days from the beginning or end of each period Order on Months on page 163 Determines the months that can be scheduled for processing Week Days Dependant on Defines the days of the week for scheduling Calendar Calendar The job is scheduled according to the scheduling criteria of the selected Calendar as described in Calendar management on page 262 Intersect with Week Days The working days of the week are selected when the job should run Exceptions on page 162 Schedules or excludes a job ona specific Month Day Order on Months on page 163 Determines the months that can be scheduled for processing 161 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Relative Calendar days from Defines t
38. Output file Output to Sysout Report Parameters Parameter Name and Parameter Value Save For more information about the emreportcli utility see Control M Reporting Facility Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Control M EM user that runs the report Control M EM user password 99 Control M Workload Automation User Guide user username password password Output to file Sends the output to a specified file to Output file type Output file Output file type Specifies the type of the output file such as EXCEL EXCEL_DO for data only PDF DOC HTML TXT or XML Output file Specifies the full filename of the output file which is overwritten if it exists already Output to Sysout Defines where to send the job report Report Parameters Defines an individual parameter whose name and value is specified Parameter Name Name of the parameter as defined in the report template filter panel Parameter Value Value of the report parameter wildcard characters can be used for text fields when the field operator in the filter panel is set to LIKE for the fields Defines the Save button to save the J ob specific settings Template Template path Host Group Defines the name of a Control M Agent computer remote host computer or host group where the job is submitted Control M Server Defines the name of the Contr
39. Resolve special values Submission attributes Advanced Defines a Program Script file or VT script file which may expect to receive parameters as input for the execution Each parameter must match its type as expected by the Program Script file or VT script To modify the parameters see Parameter display options The following types are available String Defines any string up to 4000 characters Decimal Defines a decimal number with or without decimal point The value is passed to the program as packed decimal with a length of 15 5 where the value is 15 digits long of which 5 digits are decimal positions Hex Specifies any even number of hexadecimal characters 0 9 a f A F The value is passed to the program as X lt value gt NOTE The String is the only valid type to be passed to Script file or VT script file and also to a QShell program A maximum of 99 parameters can be set per job If you need to include single quote character it must be 2 single quotes Indicates whether special values such as PGM DTAARA and FILE defined in the program s parameters value will be resolved by the script interpreter or prior to submitting a program The default value is Yes checked For more details about OS 400 special values see Reso ving parameters with special values in the Control M Agent for iSeries AS 400 Administrator guide Enables you to define submission attribute parameters for a
40. See PROCESS _CREATE_API in the HP NonStop Guardian Procedure Calls Host Group Defines the name of a Control M Agent computer remote host computer or host group where the job is submitted Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Parent Folder Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SMART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Override Path Specifies a temporarily modified job script file without changing the original script file in the File Path Member library and without changing the scheduling order of a folder Run job on all hosts Specifies that job submission details be broadcast to all agents within a defined Host in group Group All available agents in the Host Group run an identical job an
41. The Remote Browsing dialog box appears where the main pane contains the list of file names matching the criteria If no Host or Host Group have been defined the Host Host Group field remains blank To change the agent set the Host Host Group field To view the file names set the File Path field Filter the File Path by setting the Filter field oN Om Select the file that contains the script name according to the Name field and click Save In the Properties pane of the job definition the File Path and File Name fields are set Browsing remotely for the member that contains the J CL in a library This procedure describes how to select the member that contains the J CL code in a library This enables your job definition to have accurate credentials to find the member and library for the J CL Before you begin Ensure that you have selected a z OS job To change the number of members that appear use the filter field or contact your Control M Administrator gt To browse remotely for the member that contains the J CL in a library 1 Inthe zOS job set the What field to Member it means J CL is defined 2 Set the Run As field as a user with credentials to run the job 3 Set the Member Library field 4 Next to the Member field click The Remote Browsing dialog box appears where the main pane contains the list of file names matching the criteria The Run As user appears at the top of the dialog box 5 To view the fil
42. Workspace Before you begin Ensure you have successfully completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt To edit a job 1 From a Workspace select the job that you want to edit The job properties appear in the right pane 2 If the Synopsis summary view appears select A detailed view of the job properties appears in the right pane Each parameter is saved when you exit the parameter field 3 Edit the required parameters as described in Creating a job on page 74 Creating multiple jobs This procedure describes how to create multiple jobs based on a pre defined template Before you begin Ensure you are in a checked out Workspace and select folder gt To create multiple jobs 1 Inthe Planning domain in the Edit group click e The Mass Create dialog box appears In the Number of jobs to create field enter the number of jobs to create In the Template area select one of the existing templates 4 To edit the template do the following a Ifthe Edit Template button is enabled click Edit Template The Job Properties dialog box appears b To change the Job Type select the drop down menu from J ob Type 75 Control M Workload Automation User Guide c In the General tab set the fields according to the job type as described in J ob types on page 83 For information on the relevant Application Add on see Application Plug ins d To add input parameters to a script see Adding input parameters to a script on pa
43. a Workspace on page 39 m Verify that you have completed Checking out a Workspace on page 45 Verify that you have made changes to the Workspace which can include Editing a job on page 75 gt To save a Workspace nthe Workspace click Save The Workspace is saved and you can continue working in it even if you close it Checking in a Workspace This procedure describes how to check in a Workspace This enables you to save changes to the J ob Definition database Before you begin Ensure that you have met the following requirements Verify that you have have authorization to update the jobs and folders in the Workspace as described in Control M EM Authorizations m Verify that you have made changes to the Workspace which can include Editing a job on page 75 gt To check in a Workspace id Check 1 In the Workspace click In The Check in window appears 2 Follow the check in instructions until the check in is complete For more information about the check in process see Workspaces on page 37 3 Click Done The folders are checked in to the Job Definition database Adding jobs to an existing Workspace This procedure describes how to add jobs or folders to an existing Workspace 46 Control M Workload Automation User Guide gt To add jobs to an existing Workshop 1 From the Planning domain Workspace tab click i A New tab appears The tab is the Planning Home page Click My Work
44. a job making its expected run time irrelevant It also enables you to enter statistics for jobs that have not yet run and therefore do not have existing statistics You can modify these statistics at any time You can do the following Create a Forecast BIM rule on page 228 You can create and enable disable the following types of Forecast BIM rules e Quantitative Resource Enables you to update the maximum value of quantitative resources e Job Run Time Enables you to update the run time by changing the percentage or the run time or by setting the time e Condition Enables you to define a specific time for adding a condition or a group of conditions to the Condition table A Manual Condition Event occurs when a job depends on a condition that does not apply to other jobs and has not been added to the Condition table previously e Confirmation Enables you to define a time for the job s confirmation increasing the accuracy of the calculation Confirmation rules affect the entire calculation If a job awaiting confirmation is connected to more than one service any defined exception affects all services depending on it Edit Forecast BIM Rule on page 229 You can edit the Forecast BIM rules to manually revise the expected run time for a job A Service Assumption is a Forecast BIM rule for a specific service Delete a Forecast BIM rule on page 230 You can delete Forecast BIM rules Creating a Forecast BIM rule This proce
45. active jobs database until the next cleanup of the active jobs database by the New Day procedure or manual request Until then you can restore the job Recovering a job on page 195 Recovers a job that still appears in the Active Jobs database by changing the status of the job Activating external programs on Starts external programs with selected job information External programs are configured in the File gt Options gt External Programs dialog box To perform job actions you must have appropriate authorizations in Control M EM and the relevant Control M Server Rerunning a job This procedure describes how to re run a job gt To rerun a job 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the job you want to re run 3 From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Rerun A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The job is rerun Holding a job This procedure describes how to hold a job which stops the job from Control M processing and enables you to update the job gt To hold a job 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the job you want to hold 3 From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Hold A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The job is held 190 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Releasing a job This procedure describes how to free a job from a Hold state which enables the job to run
46. an advantage to collecting statistics for the jobs by defining a Dynamic Statistics definition related to a filtered list of jobs and adding the associated condition to the Condition Table for a period of time A list of periodic statistics definitions appear in the Periodic Statistics Manager You must arrange the periodic statistics definitions in order of precedence so that if a job is included in two or more periodic statistics definitions the definition with the greater precedence higher up on the list is applied to the job By default new definitions are added to the bottom of the list as they are created Since the order of the definitions is important the list cannot be sorted A statistics calendar that is defined in a z OS job takes precedence over a Periodic Calendar that is related to the job through the Periodic Statistics Manager Jobs can have one statistics definition only The following procedures describe how to view the latest statistics copy and delete a statistics definition 287 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Analyzing active jobs on page 184 View the latest statistics of a job s run time Copying a Periodic Statistics definition on page 291 Deleting a Periodic Statistics definition on page 291 For more information on BMC Batch Impact Manager and Control M Forecast see the following topics BMC Control M Batch Impact Manager BMC Control M Forecast Creating a Dynamic Periodic Sta
47. and resolve problematic jobs The Service Monitor window lists all the business services in the current forecast This feature which is only available if you have BMC Control M Batch Impact Manager installed enables you to identify critical batch services that are expected to miss their deadline For more information on the data for a service see Service analysis on page 202 For all services you can do the following Accessing the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint for a specific service on page 197 Enables you to analyze your service from a Viewpoint in simulation mode to validate actions before committing to them in production View and edit a Service Assumption on page 215 Enables you to edit and enable exceptions that affect the expected job run times of a specific service Add a service note on page 214 Enables you to add information about a service For critical batch services the service is defined as BIM If you have Control M Batch Impact Manager you can do the following Update a BIM service deadline on page 214 Enables you to updated the deadline of a job that is going to be late Locate a BIM job on page 214 Enables you to opens in a Viewpoint and you can analyze and perform actions on the jobs as described in Active J ob analysis on page 183 Service analysis To help you analyze services and manage service flows you can open services in a Viewpoint view problematic jobs view service
48. archive job log and output data from both Mainframe and Distributed systems in a secure and central repository that is separate from the production environment When Control M Server submits a job to run on an Agent the Workload Archiving Server archives the job log and output in a separate PostgreSQL database for a defined period based on Workload Archiving Policies as described in Workload Archiving configuration This enables you to meet organizational audit and compliance requirements troubleshoot your environment using historical data and enable disable users from accessing the archived data based on Control M EM authorizations Control M Workload Archiving is installed with a PostgreSQL database For more information see Control M Workload Archiving installation BMC recommends that you install Control M Workload Archiving on a dedicated server 217 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The following procedures describe how to search duplicate compare export and save archive data Searching for archive data on page 218 Duplicating archive search results on page 220 Comparing archived jobs on page 221 Exporting archived data on page 221 Saving archive data on page 221 Searching for archive data This procedure describes how to search for job log and output archived data stored in the Control M Workload Archiving Server gt 1 To search for archive data From the History domain in the Tool
49. ccc itinin inin ESE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 243 Site standards management osiris aiaia EARNE TIARE EAE Tiaia 245 Folder Management ziii adaa a i aiaa a aa aeons dead 255 Templat Sisian daaa n Eaa E a dads a aN E aa aa da NE a i aaa Eaa 258 Calendar management Sssnininiiscorin indiaani a aiaa AEEA AEEA Ea AEA ARAE 262 Control Resource MANAGEMENL cccececeeeceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeenenaas 265 Quantitative Resource Management cccecccsessseeeeeececeeeaeseeeseeeeeeceeeeaeeaeeeseeseeeeeseaaseeseseeesenansaenses 267 Condition MANAGEMENL eee cece eee eR EEE E EEE E EEE E EEE E EEE E EEE E EEE E EEE E EEE E EEE E EEE E EAHA EEE E EEE EEE EE EEE EEEEES 268 Global Conditions PIETIXES iccciceteveaiensceestaa cece bdkctnaeancenestaaaetahiahseae dean AAAA A EAA EE 269 SERVICE definitio N ies cisiaceusivannencenveeateivaneiag kavivead taut nndededng dune acca E aia a ia a i A ai a a EAE 271 Workload Policy Definition sessessseeseseersesrersrersttttttttttttttt ttt ttt ttt t E EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 280 Workload Policy MONION sricrics nenion a A aAa aN AA aE a 286 Viewing jobs ina WORKIO AG icc aacecssttide ii a aa eaaa idae aaa eddies een 286 Periodic Statistics definito Mininiai adaa iaaiiai aidaa a 287 CoMMUNICAtION MANAGEMENL cececececeeeececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneneeenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenetenenaas 291 Viewing th
50. contents and save it as a new Site customization gt To duplicate a Site customization 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Site customizations The Site customizations tab appears 2 Select the Site customization you want to duplicate DO 3 From the Site customizations group click vP The duplicated Site customization is created and appears on the right pane You can change the name and definitions of the Site customization as described in Creating a Site customization on page 244 Deleting a Site customization This procedure describes how to delete a Site customization There might be active requests using the Site customization you want to delete gt To delete a Site customization 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Site customizations The Site customizations tab appears 2 Select the Site customization you want to delete x 3 From the Site customizations group click Delete The Site customization is deleted Site standards management The Site standard tool enables you to define settings that ensure Control M Workload Change Manager web users and Control M Workload Automation schedulers follow your organization s standards These standards are applied at the folder level to new and existing folders as described in Folder management on page 255 All jobs new or old have to comply with the Site standard rules You can create multiple Site standards and assign di
51. describes how to connect jobs from different Control M Servers This enables you to set dependencies between jobs running on different Control M Servers For example you can specify that jobs in Control M Servers in Rome and Paris begin executing only after successful completion of a job in Sydney For more information about defining Global Conditions Prefixes see Creating a Global Conditions Prefix on page 269 Before you begin Ensure that you have met the following requirements 170 Control M Workload Automation User Guide You have a checked out Workspace with authorization to create global conditions For more information about authorizations contact your Control M Administrator Both predecessor and dependent successor jobs are in view in the Main pane D The drop down is set to Show Dependencies behind Hosts or Show Dependencies above Hosts gt To connect jobs from different Control M Servers 1 In the View tab Display group select Map 2 In the Main pane select a job to be the predecessor job The Condition triangle appears at the bottom of the job 3 Drag and drop the point of the triangle to the dependent job from another Control M Server until the job outline is also dotted If the Global Conditions Prefix has not been defined for a condition between the two Control M Servers then the following window appears Define a mew Global Condition prefie Create a condhtion with above prelo without de
52. do the following a Inthe Forecast tab click the Forecast section b Click the Business Services section The effects of the What If event appear in the flow diagram and in the number of jobs in a particular status c Click the J obs section The effects of the What If event appear in the flow diagram and in the number of jobs in a particular status To disable the What If clear the check box next to the What If 8 To disable or enable all the What lfs click i In the Why lt job name gt window click Close The Why analysis is complete and you can apply the changes to your definitions if the changes enabled the simulated jobs to end OK and the services to complete on time Deleting a Specific User Daily job This procedure describes how to delete a Specific User Daily job gt To delete a Specific User Daily job 1 In the Forecast domain Forecast group select User Daily Definition The User Daily Definition dialog box appears 227 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 2 Select the user daily you want to delete and click XK The Specific User Daily job definition deleted Forecast BIM rules Forecast BIM rules are exceptions that affect the expected job run times You can manually revise the expected run time for a job by creating exceptions using the Forecast BIM Rules in the Forecast domain This method enables you to compensate for new or seasonal conditions that can affect the run time of
53. field you can determine whether the grouping is according to the entire value of the field or according to the first or last letters of the field s value EXAMPLE If you group by the first 3 letters of the Application field jobs with Application BACKUPO1 and BACKUP02 will be in the same service but jobs with Application BATCH_J OBS will be in a different service e Generate service per SMART Folder Generates a separate service instance for every SMART folder that enters Active J obs that matches your filtering criteria e Generate service per job Generates a separate service instance for every job that enters Active Jobs that matches your filtering criteria Click Next 277 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 10 The Properties window appears Define a format for service name and description of the generated service definitions The maximum character length for the service name is 200 and 400 for the description You can use field placeholders which are replaced by actual job attributes in the generated services EXAMPLE The format name Service for Application in Sub application creates a service named Service for app1 in Sub app1 that contains jobs with Application app1 and Sub application sub application1 If you group according to the first or last letters of the field s value the placeholder is replaced by the first or last letter In the first example of this procedure Service for Application is replaced wi
54. groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Scheduling Indicates the JES2 workload management scheduling environment that is to be Environment associated with the job System Affinity Indicates the identity of the system in which the job must be initiated and executed in JES2 Request NJE Node Defines the node in the J ES network where the job executes Prevent NCT2 Performs data set cleanup before the original job run 97 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Control D Category Defines the name of the Control D Report Decollating Mission Category If specified the report decollating mission is scheduled whenever the job is scheduled under Control M All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function You can add a variable as described in Adding a variable on page 80 Documentation Defines a description related to the job and is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In a non z OS job
55. handled only according to the parameters in its own job processing definition SMART Folder parameters on page 144 Enables you to define extended processing parameters The jobs and sub folders that are contained in the SMART folder inherit the scheduling definitions according to the specific AND OR relationships that are defined in the job and in the SMART folder When you order a SMART Folder and runs you can monitor the status of the SMART folder in the Monitoring domain and perform actions which affect its jobs and sub folders J ust as you can define post processing tasks that Control M Server must perform when a job successfully finishes you can define post processing tasks that Control M Server must perform when all the jobs in a SMART folder successfully finish Sub Folder parameters on page 148 Enables you to apply the extended processing parameters to folders that are contained in a SMART folder When you add a folder to a SMART folder the Sub Folder can inherit the extended processing parameters of the SMART folder When you order a SMART folder with Sub Folders you can monitor the status of the SMART solder the sub folders and the jobs in the Monitoring domain and perform actions which affect the sub folder and its jobs SMART folders can only contain jobs not sub folders in Control M for z OS For more information about organizing the jobs into one of the folder types for scheduling see Specific Rule based calendar sc
56. have to run at the same time 148 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Documentation Defines a description related to the job and is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In a non z OS job the Documentation depends on whether the type is File or URL For a file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Type Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL See the following URL Defines the URL address where the documentation is located The format starts with http ftp or file File Defines the file that contains the job script Doc Path For a z OS job Doc Library defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is saved Doc File For a z OS job defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved For a non z
57. id under which the job is executing 107 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Use original runcard from user job runstream Use Run id from autoedit variable or job s runstream Allow job submission under different owner Analyze and translate variables in job runstream Inc job bkp output Do not set job owner to job wrapper on submission Perform account validation before submission Bypass checking of the status file indicator Do not run user job via ADD in job wrapper Set Condition Pages Uses the runcard as specified in the job runstream in the job wrapper Default unchecked Uses the run Id on the job runcard on submission based on the value of the Run Id field or based on the run Id as specified on the original job s runstream runcard Equivalent USER RUNIDS Runs the job under the specified user Id via the START U option Parses user runstream content and resolve any specified variables Default unchecked Equivalent RUNSARG Includes user runstream s SYM or BRKPT parts in output Default unchecked Does not set the job wrapper s owner to the specified user Default unchecked Equivalent SKIPCHGOWN An option to validate the specified account before allowing submission Default unchecked Bases the job completion and exit code solely on the job s completion statistics Executes user job content as is Default unchecked Specifies a posi
58. job The User Daily name is ordered at a specific time of the day For load balancing purposes the User Daily jobs are scheduled for different times throughout the day other than the New Day time User Daily name Defines User Daily jobs whose sole purpose is to order jobs Instead of directly scheduling production jobs the New Day procedure can schedule User Daily jobs and those User Daily jobs can schedule the production jobs Set User Daily Name when Order Method is set to Specific User Daily 143 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Enforce Validations Read only Indicates whether the the folder s enforcement policy requires resolving of all validation errors or not Site Standard Applies the defined Site Standard to the folder and all jobs contained in the folder For more information contact your Control M Administrator If only one Site Standard exits it is selected by default If there are no Site Standards defined it will be set to None Business Parameters Defines one or more Business parameters according to the Site Standard you have selected For more information contact your Control M Administrator If the Site Standard field is set to None there are no Business parameters displayed SMART Folder parameters The following table describes parameters for a SMART folder that is used to define scheduling prerequisites and actions of the jobs and Sub Folders contained in the SMART folder Only Control M Se
59. job during execution and the type of control shared or exclusive the job requires over each resource The Control Resources parameter is used to control parallel execution of jobs 43 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Quantitative Resource Max From Forecast only Indicates the name and quantity of Quantitative resources required by the job Use Definition Time From Forecast only Defines whether to use the job definition time If it is set the From and to are set according to the following Scheduling definitions From Time To Time Sets time limits for submitting the job Must End Sets the time and day when the job must finish executing z OS only Setting and changing the hierarchy for jobs and folders This procedure describes how to set the hierarchy for folders and jobs from the Planning Home New tab which enables you to view the jobs according to different combinations of Control M Server Application Sub Application You can change it from the View tab in the Workspace gt 1 2 To set and change the hierarchy for jobs and folders To set the hierarchy open a Workspace If you load jobs and folders go to step 2 If you load jobs and folders do the following a Inthe Planning Home tab Load Folders and J obs area b In the Include in hierarchy view area select any combination of Application and Sub Application as follows o Select only Application The hierarchy is Applicat
60. job from end of the week month L L the end of the week month Excepted day Order job anyway _ Defines scheduling by either ordering or not ordering the job on Don t order the job anyway the selected day 165 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Rule based Calendar options The following table shows the Using Rule based Calendar options for scheduling Define Folder Rule based Calendar The schedule is according to selected days Folder RBC Select Rule based Calendar RBC You can select any of the following Rule based Calendar types Folder Rule based Calendar Control M Rule based Calendar Select Rule based Calendar You can schedule a combination of Month Days and Days from End of Month Add RBC to RBC List Set the dates that will be scheduled included RBCs in a job sub folder and SMART folder Add RBC to Exclude RBC List Set the dates that will be not be scheduled excluded RBCs in a job sub folder and SMART folder Job prerequisites Job prerequisites are job submission criteria that must be met for a job to run You can define the following types of job prerequisites Set user confirmation Enables you to specify that a the user must confirm as a prerequisite for the job as described in Setting user confirmation on page 166 In Condition Enables you to specify one or more In Conditions which correspond to the successful completion of another job as described in In Cond
61. of the all services depending on it Average job start Start time based on existing J ob Runtime Statistics time Order Time The time that the job is ordered to run Time Time of day at which the job starts specified in hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock format HH MM This is based on the time of the Control M on which the job is run Don t Confirm If a business service depends on this confirmation job to run the Estimated End Time for this service is displayed as Will not Complete For all jobs meeting the following criteria Control M Name of the Control M whose jobs will be included in this exception definition Application Name of the application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Sub Application Name of the Sub Application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Job Name Name of the job that is included in this exception definition 234 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Mem Name Name of the member name for z OS that is included in this exception definition Mem Lib Name of the member library for z OS whose jobs is included in this exception definition Folder Name of the container into which job processing definitions are organized Host ID Name of a host computer to which a job was submitted Run as Identifies the user name for whom the job is executed Created by Indicates the Control M user who defined the job Calendar details click Advanced
62. operator and value click o To add an OR relationship to other fields click OR A row appears in the appropriate section Select the Field Name from the drop down list For more information on these fields see Contro M Workload Automation Parameters a In the Operator field select an operator as described in Filter operators on page 63 b In the Value field type the value c To match the case click Match Case Click Open to view the jobs and folders according to the filter criteria set The jobs and folders are displayed according to the filter Saving and loading a preset search This procedure describes how to save and load a preset search gt 1 To save and load a preset search After you have completed Finding jobs on page 58 in the Advanced Find dialog box select Preset gt Save This option is also available from the Customizable Filter dialog box In the Enter Preset Name field type of the name of your search Click OK To load the search click Preset gt Load and select the Preset load that you saved in step 2 You can search using the filter that you saved and loaded Deleting a filtering rule This procedure describes how to delete a filtering rule gt 1 To delete a filtering rule In a Control M Workload Automation Workspace select The Find fields appear at the top of the Map view Click Advanced i 59 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The Advanced Fin
63. other criteria You can set up a Workspace and define job processing definitions which Control M uses to control job processing and handling as described in the following topics e Setting up a Workspace on page 39 Define and review your job flow by working in a Workspace by doing one of the following o Create a new job flow You can create a new job flow by selecting blank Workspace o Continue working on a job flow You can continue working on a job flow by selecting a Workspace that you or a colleague previously set up o Load existing jobs You can load existing jobs and folders or load a copy of existing jobs and folders e Design your flows in the Workspaces on page 37 After you set up your Workspace you can implement the job design in the Workspace You can check out and edit the Workspace and save the Workspace to a Central repository You can continue working on a saved copy of the checked out Workspace even if you close it To commit the changes you can check in the Workspace so that the jobs are eligible for ordering For information on Workspace management see Workspace management on page 239 e Job definition on page 73 You can design the job flows or make modifications to the existing jobs using Control M Workload Automation This includes defining resources global conditions and setting up automated job scheduling e Handle a Request Workspace on page 67 For Control M Workload Change Manager users you
64. page 268 Enables you to view all active Conditions that are available to Active Jobs and create conditions manually Control Resources on page 265 Enables you to create the shared or exclusive resources that are available to active jobs Global Conditions Prefixes on Enables you to define global prefixes that are used for prerequisite page 269 conditions to establish job dependencies across different Control M Servers by defining condition name prefixes that indicate that a condition is global 237 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Quantitative Resources on page Enables you to create active quantitative resources that are 267 available to active jobs Workload Policy Definitions o0 Enables you to control manage and balance the workload on page 286 Control M resources and hosts Monitoring Tools Alerts Monitor on page 201 Enables you to monitor your production Service Monitor on page 202 Enables you analyze services and locate and resolve problematic jobs Viewpoints on page 241 Enables you to define Viewpoints You can then view and monitor jobs on a particular Control M Server jobs belonging to a specific user and jobs having a particular status such as failed jobs Workload Policy Monitor on page Enables you to see the current status of associated jobs with a 286 Workload Policy Communication Tools Communication on page 291 Enables you to monitor the communication status between Contro
65. part of it Examples Set the job s MEMLIB FROM home user1 TO home2 user3 Update where Out Condition Name like assign function HHMMSS The condition name is evaluated and set by Control M at runtime enabling users for example to create unique condition names in cyclic jobs The character has a special meaning and can save the previous field value Update Application assign function to new Application clear Clears the field value Fields that are assigned with a predefined set of values reset to the default value replace substring Replace all occurrences of the substring specified in FROM field with the one specified in the TO field which may be empty For example If the field contains several values a list field such as the SAP R3 Variant Name field you can replace a substring like VAR1 with another string VAR2 in all cell values using the following statement Update SAP R3 Variant Name replace substring VAR1 VAR2 64 Control M Workload Automation User Guide replace expression Regular expressions search and replace support can use references to numbered groups For example Update Application replaces expression account with 2account 1 In this example if the Application s original value was GLOBALaccount45 the update is set to 45accountGLOBAL If the field contains several values a list field such as the AFT File Path on Host
66. release it using the Free option Releasing a job on page 191 Frees resume the processing of the job If you held a job you must free it before processing can resume Running a job now on page 191 Enables the job to ignore its prerequisites and run immediately Restarting a job on page 193 Restarts the job using Control M Restart from a specific state z OS only Killing a job on page 193 Terminates the job and its associated processes Killing a specific instance of a cyclic job does not affect subsequent runs of that job Setting a job to OK on page 193 Changes the job s status to Ended OK Available for jobs with a status of Ended Not OK or for jobs in a Wait status such as Wait Time or Wait Cond or changes the job status to Ended OK without performing the post processing actions of the job For jobs running under Control M for z OS set Job to OK always performs post processing regardless of the default setting in the CTMPARM member Confirming a job on page 194 Confirms that Control M should process a job that requires manual confirmation that is the job has a Wait User pink status Reactivating a job on page 194 Reactivates post processing for the selected job z OS only 189 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Deleting a job on page 194 Deletes the job This action does not physically delete the job it only changes the job status to Deleted The job remains visible in the
67. running the job defined by the What parameter The return code is ignored Post execution Specifies a command to run immediately after running the job defined by the What parameter The return code is ignored Run job on all hosts Specifies that job submission details be broadcast to all agents within a defined Host in group Group All available agents in the Host Group run an identical job and each such job has a unique Order D More Run as Detached A regular job submitted to Control M for execution as a background process The results of the job the output are analyzed by the post processing subsystem Variables All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function You can add a variable as described in Adding a variable on page 80 Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time 86 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Documentation Defines a descriptio
68. saved Doc File For a z OS job defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job the Doc File is the name of the file where the job Documentation is saved 146 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Priority Enforce Validations Site Standard Business Parameters Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database Read only Indicates whether the the folder s enforcement policy requires resolving of all validation errors or not Applies the defined Site Standard to the folder and all jobs contained in the folder For more information contact your Control M Administrator If only one Site Standard exits it is selected by default If there are no Site Standards defined it will be set to None Defines one or more Business parameters according to the Site Standard you have selected For more information contact your Control M Administrator If the Site Standard field is set to None there are no Business parameters displayed 147 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Sub Folder parameters The following table describes parameters for a Sub Folder that is used to define scheduling prerequisites and actions of the jobs contained in the Sub Folder Only Control M Server for Distributed Systems supports Sub Folders in SMART Folders Folder Type Indicates whether the folder type is a regular folder a SMART folder or a S
69. saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In a non z OS job the Documentation depends on whether the type is File or URL Fora file the description is located in a file located in a file path Fora URL the Documentation is located in a URL address 183 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Analyzing active jobs This procedure describes how to analyze active jobs which enables you to view the job s details waiting info script log output statistics documentation and services the job belongs to Before you begin Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 gt To analyze active jobs 1 Inthe Viewpoint click on the job you want to view The properties of the job are displayed in the J ob Analysis pane on the right 2 Do one or more of the following To view the summary view of the Job select Synopsis To view the job s missing conditions resources hosts users and workloads select the Waiting Info and do any of the following a To apply conditions see Applying adding conditions to waiting jobs on page 186 b To view the predecessor jobs that are on the job Critical path and have not yet completed OK click Enhanced Path Select Script to view the job s script as described in Analy
70. see Configuring Control M Server synchronization or might not succeed in case of conflicts If this occurs you have to manually upload download the required folders The following procedures describe the available actions that you can perform in the Folder manager Uploading the Control M EM data to Control M Servers on page 255 Downloading the Control M Server data to Control M EM on page 256 Ordering a folder on page 256 Deleting a folder on page 256 Assigning a Site standard to a folder folders on page 257 Enforcing validations on page 257 Uploading the Control M EM data to Control M Servers This procedure describes how to upload the Control M EM data to all Control M Servers which synchronizes all jobs in the system by overwriting the job definitions in Control M Server with the data from Control M EM gt To upload the Control M EM data to Control M Servers 1 From the Tools domain select Folder Manager The Folder Manager appears 2 Select all folders and click Upload A confirmation message appears 3 Click OK You can also set synchronization levels as described in Configuring Control M Server synchronization 255 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Downloading the Control M Server data to Control M EM This procedure describes how to download the Control M Server data to Control M EM which synchronizes all jobs in the system by overwriting the job definitions in Control M EM wi
71. see Creating a job on page 74 and Creating a regular folder on page 76 Ensure that each orderable service is a unique entity and not dependent on conditions from another service Service per job Creates a separate service instance for every instance of a job defined in the Filter tab that enters Active J obs Orderable Enables users from the Self Service web mobile clients to order this service to the active environment This feature is enabled only if you select Service per SMART Folder or Service per job For these service types a specific SMART folder or job is ordered when the service is ordered If you select this option the Orderable Parameters tab appears 275 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Orderable Parameter fields The following table describes orderable parameters to set when creating a new orderable service Defines the Variable name of the service parameter Display Name Defines the display name of the Variable that appears for the Control M Self Service end user when ordering a service Type Determines whether the Variable is a string integer Yes No or is a enumerated value Required Determines whether a Control M Self Service user must enter a value for this service parameter Validation Determines the possible values based on the selected parameter type Note For enumerated fields possible values must be separated by a comma For Yes No fields the value determines the Variable value
72. tab at the bottom of the Map view area You can then view it highlighted in the Flow diagram Gantt view or List view Setting up a filter This procedure describes how to customize a filter in the Customizable Filter and Advanced Find window This enables you to display specific jobs and folders in the Workspace or Viewpoint gt To set up a filter 1 For Simple Filtering do the following a Do one or more of the following o To select the Job Name and Description type the value of the field o To Select the hierarchy click Hierarchy and type or select the fields you want to search o To Select the General parameters click General and type or select the fields you want to search For more information on General parameters see General parameters o To select the Prerequisite parameters click Prerequisites and type or select the fields you want to search For more information on Prerequisites see Prerequisites parameters o To select the Run Time Attributes click Run Time Attributes and type or select the fields you want to search This option is available when the searching from the Monitoring domain 58 Control M Workload Automation User Guide b To match the case click Match Case To include or exclude a term do the following a Click More b Click one or both of the following o Including Terms To include a term o Excluding Terms To exclude a term c Do one of the following o To adda field
73. that is used when the user selected Yes or No when ordering the service Default Value Shows the default value of the Variable as defined in the job or SMART folder definition Service rules A service rule is a service definition that enables you to manually or automatically generate services based on filtering and grouping criteria rather than creating many individual services There are two types of service rules Active rule Inspects the jobs in Active J obs automatically and generates service definitions that will appear in Control M Self Service This reduces the maintenance of creating multiple service definitions individually For example you can define an active rule that creates a service for all jobs that belong to APP_ Sales and GRP_Eur Every time a new job enters Active Jobs and matches the rule a new service instance automatically appears in Control M Self Service This relieves you from creating a new service definition every time new application or groups that match the rule appear in Active J obs such as APP_Sales1 APP_Sales2 or GRP_Eur_North GRP_Eur_South Manual rule Enables you to inspect job definitions manually before you generate the service definitions This allows you to determine which service definitions to generate for display in Control M Self Service The following procedures describes how to create edit copy and delete service rules and generate service definitions from the Service Rule wiz
74. the Planning domain or from the What to run field in OS 400 Full in the J ob Properties Pane in Control M Workload Automation External Subsystem on page Defines the name of the external job name or subsystem name 128 111 Control M Workload Automation User Guide OS 400 Program OS 400 Program enables the job to execute the program specified Program that resides in Library or Path on the Special environment You can access the OS 400 Program either from the job palette in the Planning domain or select Program from the What to run field in OS 400 Full Properties Pane in Control M Workload Automation For more details about OS 400 parameters see 0S 400 Full parameters on page 110 The following table describes the OS 400 program parameters Special Environment Defines the following environment where the job runs Native Enables the job to run on the native OS 400 environment QShell Enables the job to run on the QShell environment S 38 Enables the job to run on the System 38 environment Library Defines the library name where the program resides Up to 10 characters S 38 Environment Up to 8 characters Path Qshell only Defines the path where the QShell program resides The path name must start with or period Program Defines the program name to be executed in the specified special environment Overriding path Qshell only Defines the name of an alternate path or directory for the progr
75. to the J ob Definition Database It enables other users with authorization to review and or edit Workspace The J ob Definition database represents a few databases that are synchronized For more information on the synchronization settings of a Control M Server see Configuring Control M Server synchronization Job Definition and Active J obs databases J obs are often used as a catch all term to represent entities that you define and monitor For example job folder and calendar definitions are saved in the J ob Definition database When a job SMART Folders and Sub Folders are ordered an instance of the definition is placed in the Active J obs database so it can be monitored The following terms represent repositories that are part both the Control M EM and Control M Server databases J ob Definition Database A definition repository in Control M EM and Control M Server databases The default synchronization setting is to always synchronize the definition changes between Control M EM and Control M Server The J ob Definition Database holds the current definitions of the jobs folders and calendars Active J obs Database An active repository of all Active entities in the Control M Server including Active jobs SMART folders conditions and other Production Control entities such as active quantitative resources active qualitative resources and active workload policies Central Repository A central repository in the Control M EM databa
76. transition your definitions to production Step by step scenarios You can get started using Control M Workload Automation you can define and run your first job and continue with the following step by step scenarios Set up a Workspace on page 39 Enables you to define and review your job flow by working in a Workspace Create jobs on page 73 You can create jobs by dragging and dropping a template from the Job Palette to a folder in your Workspace Other ways to create jobs include copy and paste importing from XML and when loading jobs you can select Open as a copy Check out a Workspace on page You can check out your Workspace and add jobs to the Workspace 45 Define and review a colleague s You can review and take ownership of a colleague s Workspace if job definitions on page 45 you have valid authorization to view and edit the jobs and folders in the Workspace For more information contact your Control M Administrator Save your Workspace on page You can save your work as a Workspace and continue working on it 46 even if you close it Commit your changes on page After your job flow is complete you can check in the Workspace to 46 the Job Definition database You can also view conflicts with other checked out folders and resolve the conflicts Order jobs on page 53 You can order selected entities in the Workspace or the entire Workspace re your jobs in various ways You can change the hierarchy t
77. two different characters Anchor start m Denotes not when used as the first character in brackets Denotes the start of a word when not specified in brackets Anchor end Denotes the end of a word specialchar Escape character Denotes the literal value of the special character The special characters are the symbols described in this table To specify type If you specify then has the meaning of period and not the same meaning as Use to escape only where is the first character 297 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Used with to denote the literal value of the special character lt CYCLIC_INTERVAL_SEQUENCE FROM 60M 3H TO 30M 6H gt Newsfeed The Newsfeed domain is a collection of Control M discussions from social networks blogs and forums such as Facebook Twitter and BMC Communities You can view the list of all aggregated content from these sites within the Control M Workload Automation client without having to navigate to them individually For a description of configuration settings see Newsfeed settings on page 36 298
78. you to set the job to be submitted by the end of the day Allow submission past next New Day Enables you to set the job to b submitted after its original scheduled date Sets the time and day when the job must finish executing z OS only Defines an area in the Scheduling tab of the Properties pane to set rerun settings including Cyclic Maximum reruns and Rerun Member Indicates that the job must run at a designated time interval of time To set a cyclic job see Setting Cyclic jobs on page 153 Determines the maximum number of reruns that can be performed for the job Defines the name of the J CL member to use when the job automatically reruns For z OS jobs More Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters 155 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Time Zone Indicates the time zone according to which the job should be scheduled Confirmation Calendar Area of the Scheduling tab of the Properties pane that describes the calendar and Exception policy parameters Calendar Indicates the name of a Control M calendar that is used to validate scheduling dates A shift value can be used to indicate how to handle jobs that are scheduled for a non working day in the calendar Exception policy Specifies what to do if a job is supposed to run on a day that is not in the confirmation calendar Activity Period Defines the area in the Scheduling tab of the Properties pane that describes
79. 1 field the assign operator allows you to modify the whole list at once using comma separated values However you can set all cell values with the same test value like this Update AFT File Path on Host 1 replace expression test Finding neighborhood jobs This procedure describes how to find the jobs that are in the neighborhood of the selected job which enables you to analyze your job flow based on specific relationships to the selected job For example you can search for prerequisite jobs which are the predecessors of the selected job In the Monitoring domain you can open a Viewpoint with the search results gt To find neighborhood jobs 1 In a Control M Workload Automation do one of the following e Ina Workspace the Analysis tab select S Neighborhood e Ina Viewpoint in the Analysis group select S Neighborhood The Neighborhood fields appear at the top of the Map view 2 Set the Direction and Radius fields as described in Neighborhood search fields on page 66 3 Click 4 The results of the search appear in the Neighborhood results tab at the bottom of the Map view area You can then view it highlighted in the Flow diagram Gantt view or List view 65 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Neighborhood search fields The following table describes the Neighborhood Search fields Direction Defines the relationship of the search jobs to the selected jobs Dependent Defines the jobs t
80. 173 Copying a quantitative resource on page 174 Deleting a quantitative resource on page 174 Allocating a quantitative resource This procedure describes how to allocate a quantitative resource for a job which enables you specify the quantified resources for a job Before you begin Open the Workspace that holds the jobs you want to create quantitative resources for For more information see Workspace management on page 239 gt To allocate a quantitative resource 1 Inthe Workspace select the job 2 Click 3 Select the Prerequisites tab 173 Control M Workload Automation User Guide In the Quantitative Resources section click A new row is added to the quantitative resources list In Quantitative Resources do one or more of the following e In the Resource Name field type a name for the quantitative resource e From the Required Quantity field select the quantity of the quantitative resource For more information see Quantitative resources on page 173 e z OS From the On Fail drop down list select Release or Keep e z OS From the On Ok drop down list select Discard or Release The quantitative resource is allocated Copying a quantitative resource This procedure describes how to copy a quantitative resource for a job which enables you to create a new quantitative resource from an existing one gt 1 2 3 4 To copy a quantitative resource In the Workspace select the job
81. 2 227 7025 as amended from time to time Contractor Manufacturer is BMC SOFTWARE INC 2101 CITYWEST BLVD HOUSTON TX 77042 2827 USA Any contract notices should be sent to this address Customer support You can obtain technical support by using the BMC Software Customer Support website or by contacting Customer Support by telephone or e mail To expedite your inquiry see Before contacting BMC Support website You can obtain technical support from BMC 24 hours a day 7 days a week at http www bmc com support From this website you can Read overviews about support services and programs that BMC offers Find the most current information about BMC products Search a database for issues similar to yours and possible solutions Order or download product documentation Download products and maintenance Report an issue or ask a question Subscribe to receive proactive e mail alerts when new product notices are released Find worldwide BMC support center locations and contact information including e mail addresses fax numbers and telephone numbers Support by telephone or e mail In the United States and Canada if you need technical support and do not have access to the web call 800 537 1813 or send an e mail message to customer_support bmc com In the subject line enter Sup D lt yourSupportContractl D gt such as Supl D 12345 Outside the United States and Canada contact your local support center for assistan
82. 2 bmc Control M Workload Automation 8 0 00 700 User Guide May 2015 docs bmc com bmc O C Contacting BMC Software You can access the BMC Software website at http www bmc com From this website you can obtain information about the company its products corporate offices special events and career opportunities United States and Canada Address BMC SOFTWARE INC Telephone 7139188800 Fax 713 918 8000 2101 CITYWEST BLVD 800 841 2031 HOUSTON TX 77042 2827 USA Outside United States and Canada Telephone 01 713 918 8800 Fax 01 713 918 8000 Copyright 1999 2015 BMC Software Inc BMC BMC Software and the BMC Software logo are the exclusive properties of BMC Software Inc are registered with the U S Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered or pending registration in other countries All other BMC trademarks service marks and logos may be registered or pending registration in the U S or in other countries All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners IT Infrastructure Library is a registered trademark of the Office of Government Commerce and is used here by BMC Software Inc under license from and with the permission of OGC ITIL is a registered trademark and a registered community trademark of the Office of Government Commerce and is registered in the U S Patent and Trademark Office and is used here by BMC Software Inc under license from a
83. 25 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Before You Begin Ensure that you have checked in a folder where you set the order method to Specific User Daily and set the User Daily Name gt To define a Specific User Daily job 1 In the Forecast domain Forecast group select User Daily Definition The User Daily Definition dialog box appears 2 Select the Control M Server to define the user daily and click The User Daily Definition dialog box appears From the User Daily drop down list select a User Daily name In the Time field set the time you want the User Daily to run Why analysis A Why analysis provides detailed information that is gathered about why jobs are estimated to run as displayed on the job hosts The details can be obtained for a specific job or a number of jobs based on the job definitions for a specified day The Why window shows the constraints in the past and the most recent constrain that prevents the selected job from running In addition you can see the start and end of the simulation times of the job This enables you to determine how to define an earlier start time so that jobs and services can complete on time The Why analysis window is available for any job in the Forecast domain as described in Setting up a Why analysis on page 227 A Why analysis can provide some of the following additional information Job is waiting for a quantitative resource Job is waiting for a condition Job wait
84. 293 291 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The following procedures describes how to change a Control M Workload Automation password and troubleshoot connectivity issues Changing the password on page 292 Troubleshooting connectivity on page 294 Changing the password This procedure describes how to change your Control M EM password gt To change the password 1 From the Tools domain in the Communication area select Change Password The Change Password dialog box appears 2 Type your old and new password Click OK Your new password has changed 292 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Control M Servers Communication status The following table describes the columns in the Communication Status window Control M Server When the gateway is restarted Control M EM attempts to communicate with the Control M Server Determines whether Control M Server is enabled Gateway Control M EM gateway connection to the Control M Server Communication Communication route between the Gateway and the Control M Server Synchronized Synchronizes the active environment with the Active J obs file in the Control M Server Network Status Determines the status of communication between Control M EM and the Control M Server Folder Sync Determines whether Folders are synchronized with Control M Server Calendar Sync Determines whether Calendars are synchronized with Control M Server Workload Policies De
85. ART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders More Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters Run job on all hosts in group Specifies that job submission details be broadcast to all agents within a defined Host Group All available agents in the Host Group run an identical job and each such job has a unique Order ID Variables All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function You can add a variable as described in Adding a variable on page 80 Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Documentation Defines a description related to the job and is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library Ina non z OS job the Documentation depends on
86. Active Not Active between dates Start Date End Date and Statistics Calendar Active Not Active between dates Determines a date range Start Date End Date when the job or folder can be ordered or the Rule based Calendar RBC can be used During the period that the job or folder is outside the active range that is inactive it is not eligible to be ordered j Sets the date when the job must be ordered Sets the date when the job must be ordered Statistics Calendar Name of the Control M periodic calendar within which statistics relating to the job are collected z OS parameter View Defines a View button that enables you to view the Statistics related to the Statistics Calendar Active Environment Retention Defines an area in the Scheduling tab in the Properties pane that describes the Keep Active parameter Keep Active Determines the number of extra days beyond the original scheduling date that the job is allowed to remain in the Active Jobs database while awaiting execution If the job still has not run after the specified number of days the job is removed from the Active J obs database SAC Determines whether to adjust the logical date for a job converted from a scheduling product other than Control M z OS parameter 156 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Retroactively order job that its Indicates if the job should be scheduled for possible execution scheduled date has passed after its original scheduling
87. Apart from the What to run and External Subsystem External job field the following fields only apply to External job What to run Run one of the following jobs External job External subsystem External job or External Defines the name of the external job name or subsystem name Subsystem NOTE When choosing External subsystem the Run as field is set to QSYS and becomes disables for input All parameters listed below applies to External job only Enables you to select the job status which is attached as an external job Any job s status Active Job queue Output queue Duplicate job option Enables you to select an option if more than one external job matches the external job attributes job name owner and job status Error Default Do not attach the external job The Control M job ends NOTOK with an appropriate error message First job Take the first job time based that matches the external job attributes Last job Take the last job time based that matches the external job attributes 135 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Release job Move to Job Queue Library Change job command Set Accounting code MSGW Auto Reply Profile MSGWPRF Spooled files handling profile RPTDSTPRF Bypass job Skip validity checks for this job Enables you to release the job form JOBQ when the job is attached to Control M If the job could not be released a message is logged in the Control
88. Click Quantitative Resources and define the resource allotment for the jobs in the Workload Policy as described in Quantitative resources on page 173 Click Running J obs and define the number of concurrent running jobs in the Workload Policy as follows a Click The Number of Running J obs Period Definition dialog box appear b From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server where the restrictions to the number of running jobs are applied In the Running J obs field select the maximum number of running jobs From the Date Type drop down list select a date option when the maximum number of running jobs is enforced on the Workload Policy e From the Time Type select one of the following time options o All Hours Restrictions are enforced all hours on the selected dates o Between Restrictions are enforced between a time period on the selected dates f Click OK Click Host Mapping and route a group of associated jobs to a new host as follows a Click b From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server where the required Host Groups are located 281 Control M Workload Automation User Guide c From the Host Host Groups drop down list select the host or host group where the jobs are currently defined d From the Map To drop down list select the host or host group that you want the jobs to run on 9 Click Apply Changes A confirmation message appears 10
89. Click Yes The Workload Policy definition is now saved in the Control M EM database 282 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Pattern matching strings for workloads The following table describes symbols used to compose pattern matching strings for workloads Asterisk wildcard Denotes any number of characters including no characters This can be inserted in place of a string or in the middle of the pattern matching string in the place of any number of characters Note f one or more of the filter criteria fields is not needed it is more efficient to leave the field blank than to use the character However at least 1 filter field must contain a value Question mark wildcard Denotes any single character This can be inserted in place of any number of characters Comma Used to separate pattern matching strings enabling the user to specify more than one string the comma represents a Boolean OR Example host01 host02 host03 Note is evaluated literally in collection and filter definition fields character Character Any character other than one of the above denotes the specific character Note n case sensitive fields Control M Desktop differentiates between uppercase and lowercase characters for example a and A are regarded as two different characters specialchar Escape character Denotes the literal value of the special character The special characters are the symbols described in
90. EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE Ee 216 Playing back an archived event essiesheetecwleied nase aus sesnbentuenialed ned nel aadhineeeiaied ndeediale 217 Control M Workload Archiving ecce eee e cette eect eect eee e eee e eee EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EE EEEE EEEE 217 PONE CASE vssascunduvassaenevedtent aa Ee NOS A OAOE SE OEEO ES OEO AE nS ESEON 223 Setting up a Forecast WorkSpace iimis inniinn aia Na Ee aia 224 Filtering the Forecast Workspace sinisiin aiaa iiaae ia Ea 225 Updating a Forecast Workspace filt r EE I I I I EGE n nananana 225 Defining a Specitic User Daily Job sisiiigestechseeteensedee adel decd eedohiaapidecdadesgeiiies daaddueeditaasesdudtags 225 WOY analys Sisina a a i shawl nine a a ai aT 226 Editing a User Daily sirsiran iiini iniiai sien diigulbwes uiiedhiies dues shacledesbaeu duce snestiins ies due aaia 226 Setting p a Why analysis siisi0ct issectipiteet seas a ran aa AA AAAA AE TA ARAA AA TIE 227 Deleting a Specific User Daily JOD EE I IE I EI IE a aa iian 227 Forecast BIM GUIS 5 55 scceies sess see nen este tinnd neeainen adios snes deed vne ddan tend ates her dies ened a i Da Taa TE ETR 228 Adding a What If event from a Forecast WorkSpace ed 235 S bmc O TOOS sene a a a ee ee ee eee ene 237 Workspace management ec d asies ieAjans pacts asi alatteiadiian Acnndediend a AAA e aAA aA S 239 Viewpoint Management i c weit d ie ial take Malia ith A eke adda 241 Site CUSTOMIZATIONS Management
91. For example a cyclic job can be defined using one of the following methods as described in Scheduling a job folder on page 150 and Setting Cyclic jobs on page 153 Fixed interval ob runs are separated by the specified interval Variable interval sequence J ob runs are separated according to the specified sequence of intervals Specific job rerun times J ob runs are according to the specified job start times Control M Server sorts the times entered in Specific Times and runs the job starting from New Day time or Order time according to chronological order until the next New Day time If Cyclic J ob is not selected the job is not affected by the settings To provide logic to stop a cyclic job for example if the job ends Not OK create the relevant On statement followed by a Do Stop cyclic statement in the Actions tab as described in Creating Notifications and On Do Actions on page 177 Setting Cyclic jobs This procedure describes how to set the rerun settings It enables you to set how a job is rerun gt To set cyclic jobs 1 Inthe Workspace select the job 2 Click 3 In the Scheduling tab Rerun Settings area select Satay The Cyclic J ob Run Times dialog box appears 4 To set Run Every rerun interval do the following a Select Rerun Every b Set the interval and one of the following units o Minutes o Hours o Days 5 To set the Rerun using the following interval sequence rerun interval
92. M Agent log However the job is attached to Control M Defines the name of a job queue to move the job when the job is attached to Control M Click Load and select a job queue name from the generated list If the job could not be moved a message is logged in the Control M Agent log However the job is attached to Control M Defines the name of the library where the job queue resides Click Load and select a library name from the generated list Specifies any OS 400 CHG OB command keyword and value that to set the job when the job is attached to Control M The following format is used Keywordl valuel Keywordn Valuen EXAMPLE RUNPTY 77 LOG 4 00 SECLVL LOGCLPGM NO If the job could not be changed a message is logged in the Control M Agent log However the job is attached to Control M Specifies the accounting code to set the job when the job is attached to Control M A maximum of 15 characters accounting code can be specified If the accounting code could not be set for the job a message is logged in the Control M Agent log However the job is attached to Control M Must be the name of an existing MSGW auto reply profile file that is located in the Agent Data directory Must be the name of an existing Spooled files handling profile file that is located in the Agent Data directory Enables the job not to run and the following message is generated Job was bypassed Enables you to skip validity checks for al
93. M RBCs that you can add to the list of excluded RBCs 151 Control M Workload Automation User Guide J ob in a SMART Folder Scheduled according to AND or OR relationship with the parent SMART folder The job can be scheduled according to the parent RBC You can also schedule by adding RBCs to the following lists e Rule based Calendars List Schedules according to selected Folder RBCs that are in the RBC list e Excluded Rule based Calendars List Schedules according to Control M RBCs that you add to the list to exclude the order dates Sub folders in a SMART Folder Scheduled according to the parent RBC or by adding to the following lists e Rule based Calendars List Scheduled according to selected Folder RBCs that are in the RBC list e Excluded Rule based Calendars List Scheduled according to Control M RBCs that you add to the list of excluded RBCs which exclude the order dates from the schedule SMART Folder Scheduled according to Folder RBCs or Control M RBCs that you add to the following lists e Rule based Calendar List Scheduled according to the Folder RBCs that you define for the SMART folder or Control M RBCs that you select e Excluded Rule based Calendar List Scheduled according to the Folder RBCs that you define for the SMART folder or Control M RBCs that you add to the list of excluded RBCs which exclude the order dates from the schedule For more information on creating Control M Rule based Calendars in a part
94. MSG continuation line or remarks Default values for Ignore Errors IGNERR keyword and Log informational messages LOGINFMSG keyword of the Script file interpreter are used Single quote marks must be doubled in Pre or Post commands EXAMPLE SNDMSG MSG I am using Control M TOUSR SYSOPR should be entered as SNDMSG MSG l am using Control M TOUSR SYSOPR The following rules apply to pre statistics programs A job can only have one pre statistics program The parameter pre statistics program must refer to a qualified OS 400 program name in one of the following formats lt Program gt lt Library gt lt Program gt Specifies the name of a program to the process the jobs statistic information 120 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Defines the name of the library 10 characters valid OS 400 object name International parameters The following table describes the international fields for OS 400 jobs Sort Sequence Defines the sort sequence that is used for the job Up 10 characters Type or select a valid OS 400 object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Library Defines the library name Up 10 characters Type or select a valid 0S 400 object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Language id Defines the language identifier to be associated with the job 3 characters ID Type or select a valid OS 400 language ID or one of the specia
95. Planning area select Workspaces 2 From the Workspace menu select Filter Workspaces The Filter Workspaces dialog box appears 3 Do the following a From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server where the required workspace is located b From the Folder drop down list type or select the folder where the required workspace is located c From the Folder Library drop down list type or select the folder library where the required workspace is located d Click OK The workspaces that match the filter criteria appear 240 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Viewpoint management A Viewpoint is a customizable dynamic tool which enables you to display the jobs and job flows of interest For example you can view and monitor jobs Ona particular Control M Server Belonging to a specific user Having a particular status such as failed jobs Viewpoints are constantly updated and show in real time the execution status of the batch production ViewPoints consist of the following components Hierarchy Defines the hierarchical structure used to display jobs For example jobs are displayed logically according to their application settings or physically according to a Control M Server Collection Selects a collection of jobs from the active jobs database based on parameter values in the job processing definition For example ALL J OBS loads all jobs in the active jobs database You can fil
96. Server for the job you are defining and click OK A job is created in a new folder or in an existing folder The job properties appears in the right pane 3 If the Synopsis summary view appears select A detailed view of the job properties appears in the right pane Each parameter is saved when you exit the parameter field If you have a Site Standard applied the relevant parameters pattern parts are automatically populated 4 Do one of the following e To define a job in the General tab set the fields according to the job type as described in J ob types on page 83 e To define Application plug in jobs see Application Plug ins 5 Do any of the following e Browse in an OS job for a file that contains a job script in a remote host or host group on page 78 e Browse in a z OS job for the member that contains the J CL in a library on page 79 e Adding a script parameters on page 79 e Adda variable on page 80 74 Control M Workload Automation User Guide e Define job scheduling on page 150 e Define job prerequisites on page 166 e Define job actions on page 175 to be implemented after the job is Production 6 To save the Workspace click Save The Workspace remains as a work in progress in Definitions database 7 Commit the changes to the jobs and folders check in the Workspace as described in Checking in a Workspace on page 46 Editing a job This procedure describes how to edit a job in a
97. Workspace e Discard ndicates that the change to the folder job with the conflict is dicarded Show Conflicts In the workspace you can use the Show Conflicts feature to view conflicts found in a Conflict report as described in Viewing and resolving conflicts on page 50 To view versions of the entity see Version management on page 178 Viewing and resolving conflicts This procedure describes how to view and resolve conflicts found in a Workspace Before you begin Ensure that you have completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt To view and resolve conflicts S Show In the Workspace from the Edit group in the Workspace tab click Conflicts The conflicts are displayed at the bottom in the results pane Select the conflict you want to view resolve in the list The folder job is highlighted in the flow diagram Do one or all of the following e Click the Tools tab in the ribbon to view versions of the job as described in Managing versions of a job on page 179 e Right click the folder job in the flow diagram and select Compare with Predecessor and or Compare with the Latest Database Version to compare versions of the folder job e Resolve the conflict by modifying the folder job The conflict is resolved 50 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Import Export You can export job and folder definitions which enables you to save your definitions as an XML file and later import them to anot
98. ab select a service with the Update Service Assumption icon enabled gt Click The Assumptions dialog box appears S Click Edit Edit the assumption for the specific service as described in Condition rule on page 233 and Confirmation rule on page 234 You have updated the service assumption for the specific service Deleting a Service Assumption This procedure describes how to delete a service assumption This enables you to delete exceptions that affect the expected job run times of a specific service gt 1 To delete a Service Assumption In the Monitoring Home select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears In a Service Monitor tab select a service with the Update Service Assumption icon enabled Click The Assumptions dialog box appears x Click delete The assumption for the specific service is deleted 215 bme History Normally you monitor your active jobs in real time However for analysis purposes you may want to view job processing data accumulated over a particular period Control M can archive each day s processing events You can replay these events and view problems or potential problems as they unfold or capture a snapshot of your batch production job flow status from any given moment Using this available data you can determine how best to eliminate these problems in the future and how to optimize your batch processing environment What do you want to do Load a
99. alue is Yes checked For more details about OS 400 special values see Reso ving parameters with special values in the Control M Agent for iSeries AS 400 Administrator guide Enables you to define submission attribute parameters for an 0S 400 job For more information see Submission Attributes on page 114 Enables you to define advanced parameters for an OS 400 job For more information see Advanced parameters for OS 400 job on page 115 113 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Submission Attributes The following tables describes the submission attribute parameters for an O S 400 job Job Description Defines the name of the OS 400 J ob description OBD used to submit the job You can select a job description name from the generated list Library Defines the name of the library where the job description resides You can select a library name from the generated list Job Queue Defines the name of the J ob queue to submit the job to You can select a job queue name from the generated list Library Defines the name of the library where the job queue resides You can select a library name from the generated list Job queue priority Specifies the job queue scheduling priority NOTE 1 is the highest and 9 is the lowest When System default is set the job will be submitted with the system default J OBPTY value Hold on job queue Specifies whether this job is held at the time that it is put on the job queue W
100. am specified in the Program parameter Overriding library Defines the name of an alternate library or directory for the program specified in the program parameter 112 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Program s parameters Resolve special values Submission attributes Advanced Defines a Program Script file or VT script file which may expect to receive parameters as input for the execution Each parameter must match its type as expected by the Program Script file or VT script To modify the parameters see Parameter display options The following types are available String Defines any string up to 4000 characters Decimal Defines a decimal number with or without decimal point The value is passed to the program as packed decimal with a length of 15 5 where the value is 15 digits long of which 5 digits are decimal positions Hex Defines any even number of hexadecimal characters 0 9 a f A F The value is passed to the program as X lt value gt NOTE The String is the only valid type to be passed to Script file or VT script file and also to a QShell program A maximum of 99 parameters can be set per job If you need to include single quote character it must be 2 single quotes Indicates whether special values such as PGM DTAARA and FILE defined in the program s parameters value will be resolved by the script interpreter or prior to submitting a program The default v
101. and fails the failure is ignored logged in the Agent log file and the next Pre submit command is processed When there are no more Pre submit commands to process the job is submitted You can add delete edit copy or move up or down any pre submit command 119 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Pre Commands Post Commands Pre statistics Pre statistics program Determines the command line instruction to be executed before or after the specified command line The following rules apply to Pre and Post commands A maximum of 19 Pre and Post commands can be defined for a single job If a Pre or Post command is defined for a job the job is processed as a Script file object type regardless of its defined object type If the defined Object type is CMDLINE the Command line in the 0S400 tab cannot exceed 256 characters The job processes all the Pre commands in the order they are displayed in the OS 400 Pre Post Commands dialog box then the command line or the program depending on What to run and then all the Post commands in the order they are displayed in the OS 400 Pre Post Commands dialog box If a Pre command or the command line or program or a Post command fails the job will fail unless the next command to be processed is MONMSG As the job is treated as a Script file a Pre or Post command can be any valid Script file extended feature EXAMPLE PGM PARM amp name RETURN GOTO MON
102. and select a Workspace The Workspace loads to a new tab From the Planning domain Workspace group click Load The Add folders and jobs to Workspace dialog box appears with the Control M gt Folder hierarchy view The Application and Sub Application check boxes are cleared To view your jobs according to application or Control M Server in the Hierarchy field do one of the following e To view your jobs and folders according to your application select Application and or Sub Application e To view your jobs and folders according to the Control M Server definitions clear Application and Sub Application Folders are displayed according to the hierarchy you selected To filter your jobs and folders based on specific fields do the following To view the specific fields to filter click Set the filter fields as described in Filter parameters on page 42 Click OK where relevant Click Filter The filtered entities appear in the Tree view a9 5 p Select the jobs and folders that you want to add to the Workspace and click Load The jobs and folders appear in the Workspace if they are not already checked out Removing jobs from a Workspace This procedure describes how to remove jobs and folder from a Workspace If you remove a job that has dependencies all dependent jobs are removed from the Workspace as well gt To remove jobs from a Workspace 1 2 In the Planning domain from a Workspace select job
103. ard 276 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Creating a service rule on page 277 Editing a service rule on page 279 Copying a service rule on page 279 Deleting a service rule on page 279 Generating services from a rule on page 280 Creating a service rule This procedure describes how to create a service rule which enables you to manually or automatically generate services for jobs gt 1 To create a service rule From the Tools domain select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears Click New Service Rule The Service Rule wizard appears In the Name and Description fields type the name and description of the service rule Do one of the following e If you want Control M EM server to automatically generate services by inspecting the jobs in Active Jobs leave the Active checkbox selected and click Next e If you want to manually create services for job definitions clear the Active checkbox and click Next The Selection window appears Apply filters on jobs that are relevant for the service rule and then click Next For a detailed description of these fields see Parameters If you want more job filters select More The Grouping window appears Select one of the following e Group jobs to services according to Determines which jobs are part of a service based on the selected fields For a detailed description of these fields see Parameters For each grouping
104. are automatically generated for active rules are maintained by the Control M EM server and do not appear in the Service Definition Manager window They are only visible in Control M Self Service e To review the possible services click Next The Review Services window appears 11 To view the jobs in each service e To view jobs of the selected service that are in the active jobs database select Active e To view jobs of the selected services that are not in the active database select Definition The service rule is saved and appears in the Service Definition Manager 278 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Editing a service rule This procedure describes how to edit a service rule gt 1 To edit a service rule From the Tools domain select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears Select the service rule that you want to edit and click Properties The Service Rule wizard appears Edit the required fields in the General Selection Grouping and Properties windows as described in Creating a service rule on page 277 From the Properties window click Finish Copying a service rule This procedure describes how to copy a service rule in the Service Definition Manager so you can use it as a template gt To copy a service rule 1 From the Tools domain select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select the service rule that you wa
105. ata is compressed when saved To change this setting see Advanced settings on page 33 gt To save archive data 1 From the History domain in the Tools menu select Archive Search The Archive Search window appears 2 Perform a search as described in Searching for archive data on page 218 221 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Select the jobs that you want to save From the Workload Archiving menu click Save and select one of the following e Log e Output e Log and Output 5 Browse to a location where you want to save the archived data and then click Save The archived data is saved in the specified location 222 bme Forecast Control M Forecast adds forecasting capabilities to Control M that enable you estimate your scheduling environment behavior with respect to specific dates in the future Both graphic and tabular representations of the forecast provide the future dates on which a given job or a table is predicted to be submitted In addition Control M Forecast generates an estimate of the full production flow for a given future date as an enterprise wide view Control M Forecast bases its projections on Control M Server s new day procedures and user dailies Control M Forecast analyzes folder user daily jobs calendars job dependencies in and out conditions time execution windows Control M time zone settings resources and priorities in the Control M EM database and based on existing statistics
106. ating the request the web user submits the request to be handled by a scheduler You can take ownership of the request as described in Taking ownership of a request on page 68 Once you take ownership of the request it appears in the My Work area of the Planning Home page Open the request and review the definitions and notes If additional modifications are required return the request to the web user as described in Returning a request on page 69 If there are no additional modifications required check in the request and the business flowjob flow is added to the Control M definitions For more information see Checking in a Workspace on page 46 Taking ownership of a request This procedure describes how to take ownership of unassigned requests Before you begin You must have Control M Workload Change Manager activated Ensure you have the right authorizations Contact your Control M Administrator To take ownership of a request In the Planning Home page click Unassigned Work Select a request o N gt y Click Open 68 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 4 The request appears with a message at the top In the message that appears click Take Ownership You can now edit jobs and folders in the request Returning a request This procedure describes how to return a request which enables you to return the request to the Control M Workload Change Manager web user if more modifications ar
107. b you want to activate an external program 3 From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group select an external program from the External Program drop down list Searching for archived data of a job This procedure describes how to search for archived log and output versions of the selected job For more information about Control M Workload Archiving see Control M Workload Archiving on page 217 gt To search for archived data of a job 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the job that you want to perform an archive search 3 Right click the job and select More Analysis Windows gt Workload Archiving 195 Control M Workload Automation User Guide A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The archive search results appear in the History domain in an Archive Search tab Analysis Viewpoint The Analysis Viewpoint enables you to focus on different entities of all job types There are two Viewpoint modes Business Service Analysis Viewpoint The Business Service Analysis Viewpoint enables you to focus on one particular service All the jobs of the service are displayed in the Viewpoint together with additional information related to the BMC Batch Impact Manager BIM analysis This information helps you understand how BMC Batch Impact Manager determines which services are running late or failing With this information you can further analyze the results and better deal with the pr
108. based on specific rules as described in Creating a Control M Rule based Calendar on page 264 If Control M Forecast is installed you can display when and how often jobs are scheduled by clicking View Schedule For more information on validating your job definition see Forecast on page 223 If Control M Forecast is not licensed at your site you can use the CTMRPLN utility to produce a report that indicates when jobs in a selected calendar are scheduled to run For more information see ctmrpin and the Control M for z OS User Manual Creating a regular or relative calendar This procedure describes how to create a regular calendar which is a pre defined calendar based on the days of the month and or the days of the week You can also create a relative calendar only for z OS which is a way to schedule closest scheduled dates in the calendar to the marked dates on the relative calendar gt To create a regular or relative calendar 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Calendars 2 From the Calendar menu select New gt Regular Calendar The calendar properties pane appears on the right 3 Do the following e Inthe Calendar Name field type the name of the calendar e From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server where the calendar is synchronized If you select a z OS Control M Server you can select the relative option 262 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 4 5 e In
109. bed in Privileges Folder job parameters In the Site standard tool you can specify restrictions and rules for Control M folder job parameters The rules you define override the Control M rules However you can only choose to alter the rules supported by Control M but not add new ones For example if a parameter can have from 1 64 characters you can choose to set the length between 1 64 but not more than 64 This means you can set the length to be only 50 characters but not 65 You can set a default value or possible values or allow certain characters as described in Site standards rules editor parameters on page 253 You can also use Business parameters on page 247 and Internal rules on page 248 as pattern parts of the Control M folder job parameter 246 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Folder Name in your organization can only be from 1 10 characters cannot contain and only applies to OS job type Name Job Name Applied On OS x Default Value Possible Yalues Pattern Parts Possible Values X Load Length Minimum Length 1 Maximum Length 10 Characters Any character is allowed x Except for these Cai After this rule is defined in the Site standard and the Site standard is assigned to the folder the Folder Name parameter rule is applied The Control M Workload Change Manager web user and the Con
110. brary for z OS whose jobs is included in this exception definition Mem old Host Run Identifies the user name for whom the job is executed Created by Indicates the Control M user who defined the job 208 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Force OK rule The following table describes the Force OK rule which adjust the status and affects the calculation of the all services depending on it For all jobs meeting the following criteria Control M Name of the Control M whose jobs will be included in this exception definition i Name of the application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Sub Application Name of the Sub Application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Name of the job that is included in this exception definition Name of the member name for z OS that is included in this exception definition Name of the member library for z OS whose jobs is included in this exception definition organized Calendar details click Advanced Applies to Service Assumption Pel I T a gt Z o g ke 5 u 2 3 pz ow Si 2 2 a n T v o o 3 c E S Calendar Details of the Control M and calendar to be used to schedule the job Period Name of one or more periods for this exception definition which can be selected from a list Special month rules are not supported 209 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job Priority rule The following table describes th
111. cal name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job not z OS folders Documentation Defines a description related to the job and is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In a non z OS job the Documentation depends on whether the type is File or URL For a file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Type Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL See the following URL Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL The format starts with http ftp or file File Specifies the file that contains the job script Doc Path For a z OS job Doc Library defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is
112. can receive own and handle requests e Navigate in the Planning domain on page 12 You can find what you need in the Planning domain to enable you to create job processing definitions change the view of the jobs and use Planning tools You can also perform several tasks to transition your definitions to production After job processing definitions have been defined for your production jobs you can perform several tasks to transition your definitions to production For more information about Control M Workload Automation see Getting Started Workspaces After you set up your Workspace you can implement the workflow in the Workspace To edit the jobs and folder in the Workspace you can check out the Workspace from the Job Definition database and save the Workspace to a Central repository You can continue working on a previously saved Workspace even if you close it To commit the changes to the J ob Definition database you can check in the Workspace so that the jobs are eligible for automatic ordering on their Order date when their prerequisite conditions are satisfied 37 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The following table shows the main tasks that you can perform in a Workspace Navigate in the Planning domain You can find your way around the Planning domain to enable you to on page 12 create job processing definitions changing the view of the jobs and using Planning tools You can also perform several tasks to
113. cast use tools and view Newsfeed 18 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Results pane Displays results such as results of Find and Validation report Show Changes results and displays the Network Overview The thumbnail version of the flow diagram currently displayed in the Main pane with the following color indications when the Main pane is set to Map Green new Blue modified Grey unchanged Yellow Control M Server Application and Sub Application e Status bar Displays information about the flow diagram Properties pane Displays the properties of the selected entity 19 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Tools domain The following figure shows all the main tools in the Tools domain which includes the Options where you can customize your application settings for all the domains Tools Home Planning 2 Monitoring Services Services definition Viewpoints Periodic Statistics Workload Policies Monitor Calendars Alerts Templates Service monitor Workspaces 2 Site Standards Site Customizations Folders Pan 2 Production Control Batch Impact Manager Forecast Control Resources User Dally Definition Quantitative Resources Forecast BIM Rules Conditions Global Conditions Prefixes Workload Policies Definitions D Communication fe Other Tools Change Password Control M Configuration Manager Connectivity Troubleshooting Reports The following table describes the areas in
114. ce Before contacting BMC Have the following information available so that Customer Support can begin working on your issue immediately Product information e Product name e Product version release number e License number and password trial or permanent Operating system and environment information e Machine type e Operating system type version and service pack or other maintenance level such as PUT or PTF e System hardware configuration S bmc O e Serial numbers e Related software database application and communication including type version and service pack or maintenance level Sequence of events leading to the issue Commands and options that you used Messages received and the time and date that you received them e Product error messages e Messages from the operating system such as file system full e Messages from related software License key and password information If you have questions about your license key or password contact BMC as follows USA or Canada Contact the Order Services Password Team at 800 841 2031 or send an e mail message to ContractsPasswordAdministration bmc com Europe the Middle East and Africa Fax your questions to EMEA Contracts Administration at 31 20 354 8702 or send an e mail message to password bmc com Asia Pacific Contact your BMC sales representative or your local BMC office Third party Software For the provisions described in the BMC License Agr
115. ck OK The settings take effect Planning settings This table describes the Planning domain options for customizing your settings in the Control M Workload Automation client Security Resolve job s Created By field conflict Defines how to handle situations where the name of the user who saves to Control M Workload Automation does not match the Created By name Select one of the following Change Automatically Name of the user automatically resets without prompting the user for confirmation Prompt Before Changing Control M prompt the user for confirmation before changing the name of the Run As user For more information see Control M security Workspace Workspace Automatic Save Interval minutes Defines the time in minutes Automatic Save when to automatically save your Workspace Validity Checks Allow Check in and Export with Validation Errors Enables you to check in and export your workspace with validation errors 24 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Links Setting Condition Inheritance J ob Definition Check Out Enables you to view the check out notification bar when you check out a notification Workspace Add Out Condition with minus sign when creating job dependency Enables you to add an Out Conditions on page 175 with a minus sign when creating Job dependencies on page 169 Out Conditions which have been deleted appear with dotted lines Update condition name when property changes
116. click and do any of the following e Select Update gt Update value of field is changed regardless of the previous value e Select Update where value of field is changed depending on the previous value e Add operators and search values according to the available categories When you update a folder to become a SMART Folder the Rule based Calendar and Excluded Rule based Calendar lists on page 151 is defined as All Days For more information on scheduling jobs and folders see Scheduling a job folder on page 150 60 Control M Workload Automation User Guide ongga To add additional search criteria expressions click and repeat step 3 for each expression There is a sequential relationship between the expressions To change the order of the expressions click on the up and down arrow icons To delete criteria expressions select the expression and click X To match the case click Case Sensitive To find the folders click Find To perform the update click Update The search criteria used in finding and updating jobs and folders are described in Find and update job and folder actions on page 62 To manage the updated jobs by editing them rolling back the updates or selecting in view see Managing updated jobs on page 61 Managing updated jobs This procedure describes how to manage the updated jobs Before you begin gt 1 Successful completion of Finding and updating jobs on page 60 To manage upda
117. clude or Exclude area and click Delete Click Save New The Collection is created Click Save The Viewpoint is created 242 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Deleting a Viewpoint This procedure describes how to delete a Viewpoint gt 1 To delete a Viewpoint From the Tools domain select Viewpoint Manager The Viewpoint Manager appears From the list of Viewpoints select the Viewpoint to delete From the Viewpoints ribbon in the Edit section select XK A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Viewpoint is deleted Copying a Viewpoint This procedure describes how to duplicate a Viewpoint which enables you to copy a Viewpoint with all its defined criteria gt 1 To copy a Viewpoint From the Tools domain select Viewpoint Manager The Viewpoint Manager appears From the list of Viewpoints select the Viewpoint to copy Click ry The Viewpoint is copied Site customizations management The Site customizations tool enables you to do the following Simplify job properties Define which fields a Control M Workload Change Manager web user can access when creating or editing jobs You can hide or show entire tabs of the job properties pane such as Scheduling Prerequisites and Actions You can also select specific options in these tabs to hide or show Restrict creation of job types Restrict which job types a web user can create in a request For example if you do not want web u
118. column totals do not count jobs twice which means that if a job appears in more than one workload it is only counted once in the total column In addition to the above default columns displayed in the Workload Monitor window customized columns can be added Viewing jobs in a workload This procedure describes how to view jobs that are associated to a specific workload gt To view jobs in a workload 1 From the Tools domain in the Monitoring area select Workload Policy Monitor The Workload Policy Monitor appears 2 Select the workload that contains the associated jobs that you want to view 3 Click Open into Viewpoint The workload appears in the tree view and flow diagram 286 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Periodic Statistics definition Statistics are used by BMC Batch Impact Manager BIM and Control M Forecast Forecast to predict job end time The Periodic Statistics Manager is a tool that enables you to define and collect data based on the following types of periodic statistics Periodic Calendar Statistics on page 289 Enables you to collect run time statistics based on periods defined in one specific periodic calendar There are separate statistics on a specific job or set of jobs for different periods during the week month or year These periods are defined in a Periodic Calendar see Calendar management on page 262 If the average run time of a job during work days is not the same as the average r
119. cumentation Defines a description related to the job and is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In a non z OS job the Documentation depends on whether the type is File or URL For a file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Type Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL See the following URL Defines the URL address where the documentation is located The format starts with http ftp or file File Specifies the file that contains the job script Doc Path For a z OS job Doc Library defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is saved Doc File For a z OS job defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job the Doc File is the name of the file where the job Documentation is saved Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database Critical Determines whether the job is a critical path job in Control M which ensures resources allocation order 101 Control M Workload Automation User Guide File Watcher job parameters The foll
120. d dialog box appears 3 Do one of the following e To delete all the rules click Clear All the Advanced Filtering rules are deleted e To delete one rule select the row to delete and click The Advanced Filtering rule is deleted Find and Update You can Find and Update jobs as described in Finding and updating jobs on page 60 After you have updated the jobs you can manage the jobs as described in Managing updated jobs on page 61 When processing update expressions if the conditions of a particular expression are not met the expression is skipped and the next expression is evaluated However if a particular update expression fails for example if the specified change is not supported the job is not updated for any of the other expressions and the update process skips to the next job In the list of results the job is marked as skipped Finding and updating jobs This procedure describes how to find and update jobs in the Planning domain gt To find and update jobs 1 In a Control M Workload Automation Workspace select SS The Find and Update dialog box appears 2 In the Find jobs that match All the criteria area click and select or fill in the following information e Field in the job or group processing definition to be updated e An operator e A search value e An assign function or replacement value if the search value is found 3 Inthe Update matching jobs according to the following criteria area
121. d each such job has a unique Order ID Variables All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL 139 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Doc Path For a z OS job Doc Library defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is saved For a z OS job defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job the Doc File is the name of the file where the job Documentation is saved Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database Determines whether the job is a critical path job in Control M which ensures resources allocation order Tandem job assign parameters The following table describes the Tandem job Assign parameters Assigns Logical Name Mandatory Defines the logical name as it is known to the application s program Physical Name Defines the name of the file to be accessed by the user program during runtime Defines which programs use the Assign Exclusion Mode File Access Mode Record Size Block Length Determines the circumstances under w
122. d it The Viewpoint appears 216 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Playing back an archived event This procedure describes how to play back events in the from the archived Viewpoint It enables you to review events from a specific time second by second or from event to event at the speed you require Before you begin Select and display an Archived Viewpoint as described in Loading an archived Viewpoint on page 216 gt To play back an archived event 1 Select the PlayBack tab 2 From the Event group click on the navigation buttons to view events 3 From the Play group do the following Q Play e Click to view the archived Viewpoint in a slide show e Click on the control buttons to stop and or play the slide show e From the Speed field select the speed of the slide show e From the events seconds drop down list select whether you want to play the slide by events or seconds From the Slider group use the slider to choose the date and time from which you want to view events Select the playback speed by selecting the number of units and the unit type number of units step in the Speed combo box fields Click Play To intervene in the playback you can use the other buttons and the slide control To set a specific time in the Time Display enter a specific time and click Go Control M Workload Archiving Control M Workload Archiving is a Control M add on that enables you to automatically
123. d specific Control M Servers Select All To Control M Server Determines the Control M Server to automatically add or delete the same global condition as set in the From Control M Server field Select one of the following Select Select and specific Control M Servers Select All Service definition Control M Self Service is a web based application that enables you to view your services which are containers of jobs and analyze those services and jobs that are problematic After you have determined what the problems are you can resolve them by performing various service and job actions 271 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Control M Self Service If you have the Control M Self Service Add on you can monitor regular services and perform job actions in Control M Self Service If you have the BMC Control M Batch Impact Manager Add on you can monitor BIM services Service Monitor on page 202 You can monitor regular services and perform job actions in the Service Monitor If you have BMC Control M Batch Impact Manager you can view and monitor in depth analysis including projections Before you can view services in Control M Self Service you need to create services in the Service Definition Manager which enables you to model the active environment for your end users The Service Definition Manager enables you to create edit and delete the following entities Service definitions A service is a group
124. d the job s excluded RBC list is Weekends Holidays the resulting schedule is that the job will run on every day that is not a weekend and not a holiday In some screens in the application excluded RBCs are indicated with the character preceding the RBC name as in Mondays A job can have 0 or more excluded RBCs If no included RBC are specified then the set of scheduled days is empty You can select from an excluded RBC list for jobs sub folders or SMART folders in a Control M Server where the feature is enabled The RBC name must not start with the character for Control M Workload Automation version 8 0 00 fix pack 1 and later The Excluded RBC feature is enabled in Control M Workload Automation version 8 0 00 fix pack 1 for each specific Control M Server or Control M for z OS version 8 0 00 fix pack 1 or later where the Excluded RBC feature is enabled For more information about enabling the feature contact your Control M Administrator Specific Rule based calendar scheduling The following combinations affect how the scheduling works Jobin a regular folder Scheduled according to their individual scheduling criteria Jobs can also inherit scheduling rules from Control M RBCs The jobs can be scheduled by adding to the following lists e Rule based Calendars List Scheduled according to selected Control M RBCs that you can add to the RBC list e Excluded Rule based Calendars List Scheduled according to selected Control
125. date has passed Scheduling options The following table describes the various scheduling options Every Day Defines the scheduling to be every day and only runs if all the prerequisite running criteria are met None Manual Order Defines no scheduling For the job to run it is ordered manually as described in Ordering jobs on page 53 Month Days Defines scheduling according to selected Month Days such as 1 31 as described in Month Days options on page 159 Week Days Defines scheduling according to selected Week Days as described in Week Days options on page 160 Use Parent Scheduling Defines scheduling for a job or sub folder in a SMART folder according to the scheduling criteria of the parent SMART folder For more information about defining a Rule based Calendar see Defining a Folder Rule based Calendar on page 152 157 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Using Specific Rule Based Calendar Based on Calendar Specific Dates Based on Free Space on PDS Defines scheduling according to the scheduling criteria of the selected RBCs in the RBCs list and in the Excluded RBCs list This option is available for the following entities as described Rule based Calendar and Excluded Rule based Calendar lists on page 151 SMART Folder You can define RBCs to be included in the RBCs list or Excluded RBCs list This can included selecting from a pre defined Control M Rule based Calendar or creating a F
126. day is not confirmed drop down list select Shift to previous day Select the Activity Period according to Start Date and End Date and click OK Example Defining a cyclic job This example describes how to define a job that updates flight times for an airline to cycle every 3 minutes from the end of the previous run If for some reason it fails trigger an alternative flight update program notify the administrator and stop running gt 1 OO N o ooa 0O D So To define a cyclic job From the Scheduling tab in Schedule drop down list select None Manual Order In the Rerun Settings section select Cyclic and click Set Select Rerun using the following interval sequence Click In the Unit column select Minutes In the Amount column select 3 In the All Intervals are from the J ob s drop down select end Click More In the Limit the number of reruns to field select 99 In the Actions tab create an On Do Action by doing the following a In the OnDo Actions area click The On Do window appears In the When field select J ob ended Not OK In the Do field select Order J ob In the Folder field select flight In the Job Name field select AltUpdate In the Date field select Order Date Click 1 and in the Do field that appears select Notify In the Destination field select Alerts Window 9 209 5 gt 81 Control M Workload Automation User Guide i In th
127. delete a global condition prefix in the Global Conditions Prefixes manager After the global conditions prefix is deleted all jobs that require the global conditions cannot run gt To delete a Global Conditions Prefix 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Global Conditions Prefixes The Global Conditions Prefixes manager appears 2 From the Conditions menu select Delete Condition A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes The global condition prefix is deleted 270 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Global Condition prefixes The following table describes the prefixes used for defining different global conditions Condition prefix Determines the prefix of the global condition Length is up to 255 characters long Special characters such as asterisks in this field are treated as text characters not wildcards and unless you intend them as literals they might cause undesired results For example if you specify glo instead of glo as a global prefix glo job1_started will be a global condition but not glo job1_ started Even truncated strings of the global condition prefixes must be unique or unpredictable results might occur For example do not define both a DA prefix and a DAY prefix because DA is a substring of DAY and therefore not unique From Control M Server Determines the Control M Server for which the global prefix apply Select one of the following Select Select an
128. dresses parameter determines whether the default is an IP address value 1 or a hostname address value 0 Clear the Use bidirectional communication checkbox This forces the server to resolve the client s address and initiate a connection back to it Click Test The configuration defined for the client is tested for its connectivity with the Control M EM server Select the Use bidirectional communication checkbox Click Save Restart all Control M client components For more information about connectivity issues see Connectivity problems on page 293 294 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Viewing the Action Report This procedure describes how to view the action report gt To view the Action Report From the File drop down menu click Action Report The Action Report appears Detaching a Workspace or Viewpoint This procedure describes how to detach your Workspace or Viewpoint to a separate window Before you begin Ensure you are in an open Workspace or Viewpoint gt To detach a Workspace or Viewpoint From the File menu select Detach to Separate Window The Workspace or Viewpoint appears as a standalone window Attaching a Workspace or Viewpoint window This procedure describes how to attach your Workspace or Viewpoint window to the Main window Before you begin Ensure you are in a Workspace or Viewpoint that is open in a separate window gt To attach a Workspace or Viewpoint window
129. dure describes how to create a Forecast BIM rule which enables you to revise expected run times gt To create a Forecast BIM rule 1 Inthe Forecast domain click the tab 2 In the Forecast Home tab click Forecast BI M Rules The Forecast BIM Rules window appears 3 Click and select one of the following e Quantitative resource rule e Job run time rule e Condition rule e Confirmation rule 228 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Set the fields as described in the relevant field descriptions and click Advanced to set the calendar details e Quantitative Resource rule on page 231 e Job Run Time rule on page 232 e Condition rule on page 233 e Confirmation rule on page 234 Click OK The rule appears in the left pane 6 To disable the rule clear the check mark next to the rule Repeat steps 3 6 as needed for any of the rule types Click Save The Forecast BIM rules you defined are saved and the checked ones are enabled Editing Forecast BIM rule This procedure describes how to edit a Forecast BIM rule which enables you to revise expected run times gt 1 2 To edit Forecast BIM rule In the Forecast domain click the _ tab In the Forecast Home tab click Forecast BI M Rules The Forecast BIM Rules window appears In the left pane select one of the rules The fields appear in the right pane Update the fields as described in the following field descripti
130. e Action Reporte izscccspcagecedec iinan aeiaai aaea hide ia aoaaa anette 295 Detaching a Workspace or Viewpoint 0 I I I I I I EOE EEE EEEE 295 Attaching a Workspace or Viewpoint WINdOW 0 00 aed 295 Pattern matching Sting Seisi iiiaae aa a a aaan E i aa aaa 296 NE E E 298 Seme O 1 Introduction to Control M Workload Automation Control M Workload Automation is a Control M client GUI application that enables you to define and schedule your production which Control M uses to control job processing and handling You can monitor your production and intervene when necessary Control M Workload Automation enables you to do the following Define job flows on page 37 In the Planning domain you can create job processing definitions and other needed entities After job processing definitions have been defined for your jobs you can perform several tasks to transition your definitions to production in the Planning domain As part of this transition you can automate the ordering of jobs each day Monitor active jobs on page 181 In the Monitoring domain you can monitor and intervene in the processing of your production jobs in the Monitoring domain View and analyze active jobs from the past on page 216 In the History domain you can review track and analyze problems of previous days in the History domain Simulate your plan on a future day on page 223 In the Forecast domain you can determine the likely impact of potent
131. e size of the special values from the drop down list Job message queue full action Specifies the action that needs to be taken when the job message queue is full System Default or one of the special values from the drop down list MSGW Auto Reply Profile Defines the name of the MSGW auto reply profile file that is processed when the job s status is set to MSGW Message queue Defines where the completion message is sent when the submitted job has completed running Up to 10 characters Valid OS 400 object name or one of the special values from the drop down list NOTE BMC recommends that you do not change this value Otherwise when the job ends it is not detected until the next Tracker loop If the OS400 configuration parameter OVRMSGQ is not set to Y this value is ignored Defines the name of the library Up to 10 characters Valid OS 400 object name or one of the special values from the drop down list 122 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Output parameters The following table describes the output parameters for OS 400 jobs Output queue Library Print Device Output priority Spooled file action Print text Spooled files handling profile Defines the default queue for the job s spooled files Up to 10 characters OS 400 name or one of the special values from the drop down list Defines the library name Up to 10 characters OS 400 name or one of the special values from the drop down list Def
132. e 189 7 To disable the What If clear the check box next to the What If 8 To disable or enable all the What Ifs click The Viewpoint appears without the background color 206 Control M Workload Automation User Guide What If scenario options This table describes the What if event options Quantitative Resource rule on Enables you to update the maximum value of quantitative resources page 231 for a What If event Job Run Time rule on page 232 Enables you to update the run time by changing the percentage or the run time or by setting the time for a What If event Time Frame rule on page 208 Enables you to change the time frame for a What If event Condition rule on page 233 Enables you to define a specific time for adding a condition or a group of conditions to the Condition table in a What If event A Manual Condition Event occurs when a job depends on a condition that does not apply to other jobs and has not been added to the Condition table previously Force OK rule on page 209 Enables you to set a job to OK in a What lf event Confirmation rule on page 234 Enables you to define a time for the job s confirmation increasing the accuracy of the calculation of a What If event Confirmation rules affect the entire calculation If a job waiting for a confirmation is connected to more than one service any defined exception affects all services depending on it Job Priority rule on page 210 Enable
133. e J ob Priority rules by specifying the priority of a job and its critical flag This can change the priority of a job which affects the calculation of the all services depending on it Update J ob Priority Update Priority Defines the priority of a job Update Critical Defines the critical flag of a job For all jobs meeting the following criteria Control M Name of the Control M whose jobs will be included in this exception definition i Name of the application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Sub Application Name of the Sub Application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Name of the job that is included in this exception definition Name of the member name for z OS that is included in this exception definition Name of the member library for z OS whose jobs is included in this exception definition organized Calendar details click Advanced Applies to Service Assumption Application Host ID Calendar Details of the Control M and calendar to be used to schedule the job Period Name of one or more periods for this exception definition which can be selected from a list Special month rules are not supported 210 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Skip J ob rule The following table describes the Skip Job rules and the job waits for its prerequisite conditions only and then finish immediately This which affects the calculation of the all services depending on it
134. e Message field type Failure in flight update job j In the Urgency field select Very Urgent k Click and in the Do field that appears select Stop Cyclic run I In the On Do window Edit Mode click OK The job properties are set 11 To determine the maximum number of days the job can remain in the Monitoring domain after the Order Date has passed if the job has not yet been submitted set the Allow submission for parameter in the Scheduling tab 82 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job types The following table describes the General job parameters of the various job types OS on page 85 z OS on page 88 BIM on page 91 OS Dummy on page 95 z OS Dummy on page 97 Control M Report on page 99 File Watcher on page 102 0S2200 on page 106 Defines the UNIX and Windows job parameters Defines the Control M for z OS job parameters Defines job fields for defining a batch service You can define and order a BIM job to represent batch tasks that can seriously impact critical business services if delayed so BMC Batch Impact Manager can provide early warning If the BMC Batch Impact Manager product is installed select BIM Defines Dummy job parameters which provide instructions to Control M but do not run any script or command OS Dummy job Defines Dummy job parameters which provide instructions to Control M but do not run any script or command z OS Dummy job Enables you t
135. e Name field type a name for the new Site customization If you want to set the Site customization as the default click fault Do one or both of the following e To display the list of options and tabs click Job properties and uncheck the options you want to hide e To display the list of job types click Job types and uncheck the job types you want to prevent web users from creating 6 Click I The Site customization is created Editing a Site customization This procedure describes how to edit a Site customization which enables you to modify the details of the Site customization There might be active requests using the site customization you want to edit The changes take effect after a web user logs into Control M Workload Change Manager gt To edit a Site customization 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Site customizations The Site customizations tab appears 2 Select the Site customization you want to edit 244 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The Site customization pane appears on the right 3 Edit the details of the site customization according to your needs For more information see Creating a Site customization on page 244 4 Click The Site customization is modified with the new changes Duplicating a Site customization This procedure describes how to duplicate a Site customization which enables you to make a copy of an existing Site customization and edit its
136. e Periodic Statistics definition appears on the right In the Name field type a new name for the Periodic Statistics definition Edit the template as needed Click Save The Periodic Statistics definition appears in the Periodic Statistics manager Deleting a Periodic Statistics definition This procedure describes how to delete a Periodic Statistics definition gt 1 To delete a Periodic Statistics definition From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Periodic Statistics The Periodic Statistics manager appears Select the Periodic Statistic definition that you want to delete From the Periodic Statistics menu select Delete A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Periodic Statistics definition is deleted Communication management Control M Workload Automation must be constantly connected to the GUI Server The GUI Server handles communication between each Control M Workload Automation client and other Control M EM components Control M Workload Automation client depends on a constant flow of information from Control M Servers to present you with an up to date picture of the status of jobs Operator requests and global conditions are transmitted back and forth between Control M EM and the Control M Server The Communication Status dialog box displays the status of communication between each Control M Server and the Control M Workload Automation client see Control M Servers Communication status on page
137. e To set Sub Folder parameters see Sub Folder parameters on page 148 If you created a SMART Folder or a Sub Folder do the following a Define scheduling criteria as described in Job scheduling on page 150 Jobs and Sub Folders can inherit scheduling settings b Define the dependencies of the SMART Folder or Sub Folder as described in Job prerequisites on page 166 c Define the actions of the SMART Folder or Sub Folder as described in Job actions on page 175 The folder is now updated Browsing for the file that contains the job script in a remote host or host group This procedure describes how to select the file that contains the job script in a remote host or host group This enables your job definition to have accurate credentials to find the file name and file path for the script Before you begin Ensure that you have selected an OS job To change the number of files that appear use the filter field or contact your Control M Administrator gt 1 2 3 To browse for the file that contains the job script in a remote host or host group In an OS job set the What field to Script Set the Run As field as a user with credentials to run the job Do one of the following 78 Control M Workload Automation User Guide e To set the agent to a specific host or host group set the Host Host Group field e To set the default agent leave the Host Host Group field blank 4 Next to the File Name field click
138. e Work Station type from a list of work station types Default BASE Keyboard language Defines the keyboard language type for the virtual terminal Specify 3 characters valid keyboard language type or SYSVAL to use the default system value For more information about supported languages see IBM iSeries globalization documentation Character set Defines the graphic character set for the virtual terminal Specify a valid character set number For more information about supported graphic character set see the BM iSeries globalization documentation Values Any number between 1 and 32767 SYSVAL Use the graphic character set obtained from the QCHRID system value KBDTYPE Enables you to use the keyboard language type Code page Defines the code page for the virtual terminal Specifies a valid code page number For more information about code page see the BM iSeries globalization documentation Values Any number between 1 and 32767 Default DFT Use the Code page obtained from the QCHRID system value Initiation information Defines the initiation information for the VT terminal User profile Defines the user profile that is used to log in to the terminal Up to 10 characters valid OS 400 Object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Password Specify the log in password use the owner s authentication repository or set to use the password program Device name Name of display device Up to 10 characters
139. e based Calendar and Excluded Rule based Calendar lists on page 151 Rule based Calendar and Excluded Rule based Calendar lists Jobs sub folders and SMART folders can use specific Rule based Calendars by using the Using Specific Rule based Calendar scheduling option which enables you to add pre defined Control M Rule based Calendars to lists add pre defined Folder Rule based Calendar or add and define a Folder Rule based Calendar However for jobs that are in regular folders the specific combination is different than for jobs in SMART folders Also the sub folders have different scheduling options than SMART folders as described in Specific Rule based calendar scheduling on page 151 You can define Rule based Calendars RBCs to set the dates that will be scheduled included RBCs in a job sub folder and SMART folder by adding and selecting the RBCs for the Rule based Calendar list The defined RBCs can also be used to set the dates that will not be scheduled excluded RBCs in a job sub folder and SMART folder by adding and selecting RBCs for the Excluded Rule based Calendar list as described in Scheduling a job folder on page 150 The scheduling of a job with included RBCs and excluded RBCs is determined by combining the specified days of the included RBCs combining the specified days of the excluded RBCs and then removing the set of the excluded RBCs from the set of the included RBCs If a job s RBC list is Everyday an
140. e names set the Library field Filter the Library by setting the Filter field Select the member that contains the J CL name according to the Name field and click Save In the Properties pane of the job definition the Library and Member fields are set Adding input parameters to a script This procedure describes how to add script parameters to jobs which run scripts OS only gt To add a script parameter 1 From the General tab of your job Properties pane in the What section select Embedded Script or Script 79 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 2 Enter the values for script as follows e For Embedded Script Script and File Name e For Script File Path and File Name 3 Inthe Variables field click E and type the variable in the table The variable is added to the Properties pane Uploading agent utilities to remote hosts This procedure describes how to upload agent utilities to remote hosts which enables you to use scripts without changing them if you have an OVMS agentless solution or you convert an agent to a remote host gt To upload agent utilities to remote hosts Set the UPLOAD_REMOTE_UTILS parameter to Y as described in Defining Control M Agent system parameters For more information about remote hosts see Defining a remote host Adding a variable This procedure describes how to add a variable parameters to jobs gt To add a variable 1 From the General tab of your job Properties pane
141. e of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Scheduling Indicates the JES2 workload management scheduling environment that is to be Environment associated with the job System Affinity Indicates the identity of the system in which the job must be initiated and executed in JES2 Request NJE Node Defines the node in the J ES network where the job executes Prevent NCT2 Performs data set cleanup before the original job run Control D Category Defines the name of the Control D Report Decollating Mission Category If specified the report decollating mission is scheduled whenever the job is scheduled under Control M All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function You can add a variable as described in Adding a variable on page 80 89 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Documentation Doc Library Doc Member Priority Emergency Job Defines a description related to the job and is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In anon z OS job the Documentation depends on whether the type is
142. e original Any changes you make apply only to the current copy you are editing They do not apply to the original or to any other copies that might appear in the active jobs database Modifying a job in Monitoring This procedure describes how to modify a job in the Monitoring domain which enables you to update a job s details gt To modify a job in Monitoring 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Double click the job you want to modify The job properties window appears Click Modify J ob to update the job s parameters For more information see J ob definition on page 73 Click Save 188 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The job is updated Intervention actions Intervention actions enable you to intervene manually when special critical processes and potentially problematic situations arise You can perform the following intervention actions on jobs displayed in the Viewpoint Rerunning a job on page 190 Reruns the job Holding a job on page 190 Holds stop processing the job If the job has not started to execute Hold prevents it from executing even after all submission criteria are satisfied If the job is executing Hold does not stop its execution but the job maintains its Executing status until the job is freed If the job has completed executing while Held it must be freed before you can rerun it again The job remains in the Held state until you
143. e required Before you begin gt You must have Control M Workload Change Manager activated Ensure you have the right authorizations Contact your Control M Administrator To return a request In the Planning Home page select the request The request Workspace appears t From the Workspace group in the Workspace tab click Return A confirmation message appears Click Yes The request is returned to the web user The request is now in Requester Works status and is in read only mode You cannot modify the request For more information see Request statuses 69 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Request statuses The following table lists the request statuses Requester Works Indicates that the requester is editing the job flow in the request If the requester is working on the request the request is in read only mode The scheduler cannot modify the request Submitted Indicates that the request is submitted to the scheduler to handle In Control M Workload Change Manager the request is in read only mode and cannot be modified by the requester Scheduler Works Indicates that the scheduler is editing the job flow in the request If the scheduler is working on the request the request is in read only mode The requester cannot modify the request Returned Indicates that the request is returned by the scheduler to the requester appears in the Workspace Manager This usually happens if the scheduler is requesti
144. e specified in a terminal for the specific computer and is part of the job definition For information about verification of J CL code in a job definition see Verifying J CL code in a job definition on page 49 88 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M for z OS that processes the job Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Parent Folder Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SMART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders Read only field More Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters Override Path Specifies a temporarily modified job script file without changing the original script file in the File Path Member library and without changing the scheduling order of a folder Run as started task Specifies that the job is invoked with the operator START command Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the nam
145. e the application to malfunction or crash at a later time CORBA exceptions Warning messages Defines unexpected events that do not stop the application but may limit functionality Click the default button to return to your default settings Keep log level for Enables you to keep the log level for your next session next application runs Log Files Enables you to view your log files where data is generated General Enables you to view time level and a message summary Details Enables you to view information including the time level message and detailed information Dump Enables you to view debug and information including time level message and thread You can view in this only where there is a major problem 35 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Newsfeed settings The following table describes the configuration settings for Newsfeed in the Control M Workload Automation client Show Newsfeed Determines whether to show the Newsfeed in the Control M Workload Automation client Automatically refresh news every Determines the number in minutes when to automatically refresh lt number_of_minutes gt minutes the newsfeed News Channels Determines which sites and forums appear in the Newsfeed such as Facebook Twitter and other blog and forum sites 36 Seme O Planning You can define your job flows in the Planning domain of Control M Workload Automation according to your site flows priorities and
146. e year If you want to select another date clear this option 55 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Select a date Wait for Order Date to run Order Into Folder Create Duplicate Set Variables Determines if the job or folder is ordered on a selected date including year If you want select the current working date clear this option Determines if the jobs must wait for the defined Order date to run For example time zone jobs are ordered before their order date Determines how to order jobs or Sub Folders that belong to a SMART Folder J obs and Sub Folders are added to a SMART Folder according to the following Order Into Folder options New insert jobs into a new folder Recent insert jobs into a recent folder Selected insert jobs into a selected folder Use the Folder Order ID field to select Standalone insert the jobs into a regular folder If this option is selected the Create Duplicate field is disabled If the job or Sub Folder is inserted into an existing folder or Sub Folder that has already completed the status of all parent folders is set to Executing If it is not possible due to scheduling criteria the job remains in WAIT_SCHEDULI NG status This parameter is ignored if the folder that is ordered is not a SMART Folder Defines if Jobs and or Sub Folders with the same name that already exist in the Folder are added to the SMART folder when you select Recent or Selected Determin
147. ead SE Newsfeed Items Displays the Newsfeed items from the selected Newsfeed channel Newsfeed Channels Displays the available Newsfeed channels such as Twitter Facebook and BMC forums Domain Selector Lists the various functional areas in the application where you can plan monitor view history forecast use tools and view Newsfeed items Reading pane Displays the content of the selected Newsfeed item 21 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Customized settings You can customize various defaults for the Control M Workload Automation client as described in Customizing your default settings in the Workload Automation client on page 24 The following table describes the main categories for settings that you can customize Monitoring on page 26 Forecast on page 28 Job Properties on page 29 Maps on page 29 Alerts on page 32 Enables you to set the following options for the Planning domain Security Workspace Automatic Save Validity checks Dependency setting Condition Inheritance Job Definition counters Enables you to set the following options for the Monitoring domain Startup Open into local view Automatic refresh Enables you to set the following options for the Forecast domain Color Settings Forecast Calendar Display What If Scenario Enables you to select to show Help Bar for the Definitions window Enables you to set the following options for the Map for al
148. ed or Internal rules on page 248 After this rule is defined in the Site standard and the Site standard is assigned to the folder the Job Name parameter rule is applied The Control M Workload Change Manager web user and the Control M Workload Automation scheduler modifying the folder with that Site standard will have to comply with the J ob Name rule you defined If they do not comply with the rule a warning error appears They can ignore or fix the warning error depending on the enforcement policy you set as described in Enforcing validations on page 257 For more information on how to define Business parameters see Creating a Site standard on page 250 Internal rules In the Site standard tool you can create internal rules that can be used in Folder job parameters on page 246 and Business parameters on page 247 Internal rules are recurrent rules that you use in Control M folder job parameters and Business parameters Instead of creating this rule everytime you create a folder job parameter rule you can create an internal rule and specify the invalid characters as described in Site standards rules editor parameters on page 253 Now you can reuse the internal rule in each folder job parameter rule you create All folder job parameters cannot contain the characters Job name cannot contain characters Application cannot contain File name cannot contain 1 248 Control M Workload Automation User Guide
149. eement and Order related to third party products or technologies included in the BMC Product see https docs bmc com docs display workloadautomation Control M Workload Automation Documentati on and click Third party software TPS Sbme O Contents Introduction to Control M Workload Automation cceccccecrercnne ae eeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaae 7 Control M Workload Automation login profiles EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEa 7 Control M Workload Automation navigation ekekeke 11 Customized settings fs ccsselaaiiavbcaveradvdeni ten Rad aiea iA aAA AA A ES AO EA A AA DAEA 22 PINNI mca E cia TE E EE E E a e E EEE 37 WOrkSpatES nsaria aaa a anaia aAA Ea ea iA capac oud aa a Ania AaS 37 Request Workspace siropini a aie A Raed da 67 J OD definitio misanna dinni a ad a a a i a 73 Version ma agementanasoninona aAa AE ina decane a AAT AE EA 178 Job and Folder File Editing TOOl ccsaicsvecenetiacsenacanesanassaccieastenteaaaainnn veachanstenasaileleadagineandhiivedsheceteteral 180 MONItOYINO scini eied i iiaiai ANETE EER SEEE EEEE EREDE NEN EEEE EER 181 VIEWDOIN Sienen aa aa e Ea e E E E TA e e stan 181 Alerts MOMItO erriei anaa aaae D AA E AAE EE A AEA a 201 Service MOMMOM iii cavyteveti eed vane nd airi ai ana a ia i A iia e ai aaea ETE EAEE NE 202 PIStOFY nicchinetiteecechapabeceberatanthetescaceecaiauedateiauccataieusiagabduedanadenecadebeutied hanesemeeeereataenctanuad 216 Loading an archived Viewpoint cceececseeee este eect ee eee EE EAHA EEE AEH t AHA EEEE
150. efines the name of the following Naming Server fields Host Defines the name of the server where the Naming Service lists the Control M EM GUI servers for the environment Port Defines the port of the server where the Naming Service lists the Control M EM GUI servers for the environment Automatically Detect Defines whether the Server field Control M EM GUI server is connected automatically based on availability Server Defines which Control M EM GUI server in the Naming Service list to connect to Domain Optional Defines which LDAP domain associated with Control M EM GUI server in Server list to connect to 10 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Control M Workload Automation navigation From the Control M Workload Automation client You can learn about the following domains by viewing the following figures Planning Enables you to create job processing definitions After job processing definitions have been defined for your production jobs you can perform several tasks to transition your definitions to production as described in Planning domain on page 12 Monitoring Enables you to monitor and intervene in the processing of your production jobs as described in Monitoring domain on page 14 History Enables you to review track and analyze problems of previous days as described in History domain on page 16 Forecast Enables you to determine the likely impact of potential changes to the system as descr
151. efinition dialog box appears 3 In the Name field type a new name for this service You can also update other fields as described in Creating a service definition on page 272 4 Click OK Deleting a service definition This procedure describes how to delete a service definition from the Service Definition Manager Before You Begin Successful completion of Logging in to Control M Workload Automation on page 8 gt To delete a service definition 1 From the Tools domain select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears Select the service definition that you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The service definition is deleted Service options The following table describes options for creating a service 274 Control M Workload Automation User Guide NOTE Control M Self Service users cannot hold or release services that are not based on a job or a SMART folder Service based on filter Determines which jobs are part of a service based on the selected filters For a detailed description of these filters see Parameters Service per ODAT based on Creates a separate service instance for all jobs that matches filter the selected filters and have different ODAT values Service per SMART Folder Creates a separate service instance for every instance of a SMART Folder defined in the Filter tab which enters Active Jobs To group jobs to a SMART Folder
152. elect a BIM service The service that you select has a amp icon in the BIM column He Click pene The Update Service Deadline dialog box appears In the New Deadline field enter a time and click Click OK The BIM service deadline is updated Locating a BIM job This procedure describes how to locate the BIM job in the Viewpoint when you select a BIM service in the Service Monitor is a BIM service gt 1 To locate a BIM job In the Monitoring Home select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears In a Service Monitor tab select a BIM service The service that you select has a amp icon in the BIM column A Click The BIM job is selected in the Viewpoint Adding a service note This procedure describes how to add a service note gt 1 To add a Service note In the Monitoring Home select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears In a Service Monitor tab select any service 214 Control M Workload Automation User Guide a Click S The Update Service Note dialog box appears In the Note field type a note Click OK The note is created Editing a Service Assumption This procedure describes how to edit a service assumption This enables you to update exceptions that affect the expected job run times of a specific service gt 1 To edit a Service Assumption In the Monitoring Home select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears In a Service Monitor t
153. elect the calendar and click Check in 264 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The calendar synchronizes in the Definitions database If your synchronization setting is set to No Synchronization see Configuring Control M Server synchronization you can upload the calendar to Control M Server by clicking Upload drop down list and selecting Upload to upload calendar to Control M Server or Force Upload same as Upload but override changes Duplicating a calendar This procedure describes how to duplicate a calendar which saves you time from creating another calendar with the same definitions gt To duplicate a calendar 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Calendars 2 Select a calendar that you want to duplicate 3 Click Duplicate A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes A new calendar appears in the table with the same definitions Deleting a calendar This procedure describes how to delete a calendar gt To delete a calendar 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Calendars 2 Select a calendar that you want to delete 3 Click Delete A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The calendar is deleted Control Resource management A control resource is a physical or logical device that is defined by the control that a job needs over it exclusive or shared Data information resources such as files tables and databases are frequently control resources You can de
154. elf Service and Workload Automation with BMC Principal Software Consultant Martin 6 11 2013 1 20 PM The BMC Contro Linkedin just group surpassed 2 000 members If you are interested in workload automation jot Hello good evening I m entering the world of Control_m administrators any questions or concerns I can ask here Photo See our archive of free support webinars Click here and look for this panel on the right side of communitie We chose BMC and Control M because a lot of our large clients actually use Control M to feed us the data We cho 6 3 When was mainframe ever not hip Video ChipRewards uses BMC ControbM Workload Automation for batch processing and doud resourcing for the 5 29 2013 6 50 PM Maximize the value of your BMC Control M solution with a proven approach to full value realization BMC Consultin 5 29 2013 6 20 PM Control M Version amp New interface with powerful new features BMC Software In the base release of Control M V8 release m November last year a completely redesigned interface was delivered With the release of fix pack 1 thir interface now has several new features and fianctionality such as zero down time agent upgrades remote browsng and load balancing just to name a few The following table describes the areas in the Newsfeed domain in Control M Workload Automation 1 Ribbon Displays the available Newsfeed actions Refresh Delete Read and Unr
155. ent to the correct hosts ports and servers and to configure the application to automatically detect the first available server gt 1 2 3 To edit a login profile In the Control M Workload Automation login screen select Environment Click E In the Choose Server dialog box type the parameters as described in Creating a login profile on page 8 Click OK The login profile is edited and is selected in the login screen To log in see Logging in to Control M Workload Automation on page 8 Deleting a login profile This procedure describes how to delete the login profile gt B O N gt To edit a login profile In the Control M Workload Automation login screen select Environment Select any of the rows except the default environment Click E In the confirmation dialog box click Yes The selected login profile is deleted and a different environment is selected in the login screen Logging out of Control M Workload Automation This procedure describes how to log out of Control M Workload Automation gt 1 2 To log out From any domain click the File tab Select Exit Control M Workload Automation User Guide Login Profile selection parameters Login Profile Selection parameters enable you to connect to Control M EM GUI server for your environment from the Control M Workload Automation client Environment Defines the name of the environment such as Test or Production Naming Server D
156. erver or Force Upload same as Upload but override changes Creating a periodic calendar This procedure describes how to create a periodic calendar which is a pre defined calendar based on different calendar periods that you define The periods can be nonconsecutive of varying length and overlapping No single period can exceed 255 days gt 1 2 To create a periodic calendar From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Calendars From the Calendar menu select New gt Periodic Calendar The calendar properties pane appears on the right Do the following a In the Calendar Name field type the name of the calendar b From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server where the calendar is synchronized c In the Description field describe details about the calendar 263 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 4 5 d Select a period A Z 1 9 to assign the calendar definition Do one of the following e Inthe calendar select the days that you want the job to run for the selected period e Select Recurrence and do the following a Select the days of the month and or the days of the week that you want the job to run for the selected period b From the Apply on drop down list select the years that you want the selected month days and week days applied to for the selected period c Click OK Click OK The periodic calendar is created and appears in the calendar table
157. es describe how to create copy delete activate and deactivate Workload Policy Definitions Creating a Workload Policy Definition on page 281 Copying a Workload Policy Definition on page 283 Deleting a Workload Policy Definition on page 284 Activating a Workload Policy Definition on page 284 Deactivating a Workload Policy Definition on page 285 280 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Creating a Workload Policy Definition This procedure describes how to create a Workload Policy Definition which enables you to limit the Workload Policy s quantitative resource use limit the number of associated jobs that run concurrently and route a group of associated jobs to a new host gt To create a Workload Policy Definition 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Workload Policy Definition The Workload Policy Definition manager appears From the Workload Policy Management menu select New The Workload Policy Definition properties pane appears on the right Do the following a Inthe Name field type a name for the Workload Policy b In the Description describe the purpose of the Workload Policy Click General and from the State drop down list select one of the following e Active e Inactive Click Filter and filter for entities that are required for the Workload Policy For a list of available filter wildcards see Pattern matching strings for workloads on page 283
158. es not wait for acknowledgment that the process was created wait manner Produce CTMRJOB__ Determines whether the CTMR OB diagnostics are turned on for this specific job dianostics overriding the value specified by the GUARDIAN configuration parameter CTMRJ OB_DIAG Creation option Defines information about the environment of the new process Valid values 0 127 See PROCESS _CREATE_API in the HP NonStop Guardian Procedure Calls Field Name CREATE_OPTION Set mode option Defines the SETMODE command to be issued for the created process See SETMODE API in the HP NonStop Guardian Procedure Calls Field Name SETMODE lt function gt lt Param1 gt lt Param2 gt Defines an integer job ID that specifies the job to be created See Run Command in the HP NonStop TACL Commands and Functions Set to GEN to instruct Control M to generate a unique Job ID Swap file for data Enables you to use the parameter for informational purposes only See Run Command in the HP NonStop TACL Commands and Functions Field Name SWAP 138 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Swap for extended Enables you to allocate swap space for the default extended segment of the process data See Run Command in the HP NonStop TACL Commands and Functions Field Name EXT_SWAP Memory pages Specifies the initial number of memory pages in which the process is created Debug attribute Enables you to set the debugging attributes for the new process Valid values 0 15
159. es the ad hoc variable assignments that you can add in addition to the ones in the job definition For more information see Variables 56 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Search for jobs The following table describes how to search for jobs and services in the flow diagram of a Workspace or Viewpoint which enables you to analyze job definitions in the Workspace and analyze critical batch services in your Viewpoint Find on page 57 Enables you to find jobs Find and Update on Enables you to find update and manage jobs page 60 tues Neighborhood on Ss Neighborhood Enables you to search for predecessor and dependent jobs page 65 Critical Path on page Critical Path Enables you to search for the jobs that most impact the 66 completion time of a service in Production Enhanced Path on Enables you to find the predecessor jobs that did not complete page 186 or did not complete OK Filter Critical Path 7 Enables you to switch between filtering according to Critical Path between two jobs and All J obs filter Find Latest Time _ Enables you to find the latest time difference between an Gap toe estimated job start time and the time when all of the predecessor jobs are finished Enables you to find the service in a Viewpoint Highlight Time Enables you to find the jobs with a time difference between the Gaps estimated job start time and the time when all of the predecessor jobs are finished Find
160. ess the Analysis Viewpoint Before you begin Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 gt 1 To access the General Analysis Viewpoint In the Viewpoint click on the entity you want to view such as a single job sub application folder or SMART folder 197 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The properties of the selected entity are displayed in the J ob Analysis pane on the right o Open Analysis Viewpoint 2 From the Analysis tab click The Analysis Viewpoint is displayed according to the entity you selected Analysis Viewpoint Information This table lists the Service Monitor Live parameters that appear in the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint Analysis Entity The name of the entity Entity Type The type of entity Job or Folder Estimate To Completion Estimated end time HH MM SS MM DD GMT HH MM Service Monitor live parameters This table lists the Service Monitor Live parameters that appear in the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint Service Name The name of the service Service Status The status of the service for more information see Active J ob statuses on page 185 Estimate To Completion Estimated end time HH MM SS MM DD GMT HH MM 198 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Analysis Viewpoint Dashboard parameters This table lists the Business Service Dashboard parameters that appear in the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint T
161. ete path Enables you to see the entire critical path Show until first gap Enables you to see part of the critical path that has the most direct impact on the completion time The critical path is indicated in the flow diagram by special markings on the job hosts If Forecast predicts that the Business Service is delayed the user can examine the jobs in the critical path to determine what factors are delaying the jobs Show Control M New Day indicators in Gantt view Enables you to see red vertical lines in the Gantt chart that indicate the beginning of the New Day for each Control M Changes only take effect after forecast refresh or it is restarted What if Scenario Automatic Run Forecast on scenario update Enables you to automatically run a forecast when the What If scenario is changed 28 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job Properties settings This table describes the J ob properties view options for customizing your settings in the Control M Workload Automation client Show Help Bar on Enables you to view the Help Bar in the Properties pane Definitions Window Job s Output External Viewer Enables you to select an external program to view the job s output Time Synonym Enables you to change the time fields from the default time to NewDay time plus 23 59 Map settings This table describes the Map options for customizing your settings in the Control M Workload Automation client Backgrou
162. eviation from the average completion time for a job in the service If the run time falls within the tolerance set it is considered on time otherwise it has run too long or ended too early The values are Percentile range or Average Run Time in percentage or by minutes Percentile range Defines the number of standard deviations of job run in this service Percentile Range is the default method for specifying J ob Run Time Tolerance Average run time The percentage of the time based on the average run time for the job or the number of minutes that the job can be early or late and still be considered on time For information on setting the service completion time see Service must complete Defines an area of the Properties pane for defining the Control M Server of the job Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Defines an area of the Properties pane for defining how the job runs For example it includes the Run as user Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism 92 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Parent Folder Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SM
163. export selected jobs and folders do the following a Select the entities to export b Select and select Export Selected Entities e To export the Workspace click Po In the Save As dialog box set the File name and click Save The file is saved as an XML file Importing jobs to a Workspace This procedure describes how to import jobs and folders from an XML or a crontab file gt 1 To import jobs to a Workspace From the Home tab in the Workspace group click Pet The Open dialog box appears Browse to the file you want to import In the drop down list next to the File name field select one of the following e Xml File xml 51 Control M Workload Automation User Guide e UNIX CRON Files crontab Select the file to import and click Open The file is imported if is valid and no conflicts exist If the Import Error and Conflicts dialog box appears then there are errors and or conflicts If an error appears read the message and then do the following a View the Message in the Message column b Click Cancel c Fix the error in the XML file d Import the file again To resolve other conflicts such as an unknown Control M Server in the Resolution column select one of the following from the drop down menu and follow the on screen instructions e Unresolved Conflict e Don t import e Use temporary Control M Server e Assign existing Control M Server If you selected Use temporary Co
164. f In Conditions A B and C on the Order Date are in the Conditions table After J ob X Ends OK the Out Condition D is added to the Conditions table Other jobs that are waiting for the condition as their In Condition can start running and A B and C conditions are removed from the Conditions table Creating an Out Condition This procedure describes how to create an Out Condition for a job which enables you to establish that the condition is added to or removed from the active jobs database when the job ends 175 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Before you begin You must have a Workspace with a couple of jobs to create Out Conditions For more information see Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt A O Nz oN Om To create an Out Condition In the Workspace select the job Click Select the Actions tab In the Out Conditions section click The Condition Details window appears In the Name field type a name for the Out Condition From the Order Date drop down list select the order date for the job to run From the Add Remove The Condition drop down list select Add or Remove Click OK The Out Condition is created To set Output Handling set the Action field as described in Action An Out Condition is displayed in the job flow as a broken line Copying an Out Condition This procedure describes how to copy an Out Condition for a job which enables you to create a new Out Condition from an e
165. f any notes remain in open status and were not approved when you check in the request the check in fails You must approve any open notes before checking in a request to the database Handling requester notes This procedure describes how to view and handle notes from the requester gt To handle requester notes 1 Inthe request in the bottom pane click the Notes tab The Notes information appears in the bottom pane 2 Click on the selected note If it is a folder job note the relevant entity is highlighted in the flow diagram The note text appears in the right pane You can reply to the web user as described in Adding a note to a request on page 71 and Adding a note to a folder job on page 72 3 If you handled the notes you can mark it as resolved as decribed in Resolving notes on page 71 Resolving notes This procedure describes how to resolve notes which enables you to mark and close open notes that were handled gt To resolve notes 1 Inthe request in the bottom pane click the Notes tab The Notes information appears in the bottom pane 2 Click on the selected note If it is a folder job note the relevant entity is highlighted in the flow diagram The note text appears in the right pane 3 Click Resolve Adding a note to a request This procedure describes how to add a note to a request which enables you to communicate with the web user and write necessary instructions or other information 71 C
166. fault the job ends in NOTOK if errors are encountered in this command at run time Submission Attributes Enables you to define submission attribute parameters for an 0S 400 job For more information see Submission Attributes on page 114 Advanced Enables you to define advanced parameters for a OS 400 job For more information see Advanced parameters for OS 400 job on page 115 Ignore all errors Script File Multiple commands and VT only Enables you to ignore errors encountered in any of the commands specified by the job The error message is logged in the job log and the processing is resumed from the next command Log informational messages Script File Multiple commands and VT only Enables additional informational messages logged in the job log when the job is executing 126 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Subsystem Subsystem enables a job to start a subsystem specified in Subsystem that resides in Library and monitors the active subsystem until the subsystem ends Subsystem ending code is always OK regardless of the method used to end it The following table describes the Subsystem parameters for an OS 400 job Library Defines the library name Up to 10 characters valid OS 400 Object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Subsystem Specifies the name of a subsystem description that defines the operational environment subsystem being started Overriding library Defines the na
167. fferent Site standards to different folders 245 Control M Workload Automation User Guide You can set rules such as character length for a specific field as described in Site standards rules editor parameters on page 253 The Site standard tool consists of the following parts Folder job parameters on page 246 Defines rules and restrictions for specific Control M folder job parameters Business parameters on page 247 Defines parameters specific to your business that carry a special business meaning nternal rules on page 248 Defines rules that can be reused as rules in Control M folder job parameters and business parameters Condition format Defines a default condition name format that is used by the Workload Change Manager web user and the Control M Workload Automation scheduler The Site standard rules are validated and errors and warnings appear to the web user upon submission of a request and to the scheduler upon check in The handling of these warnings errors depends on the enforcement policy set at the folder level For more information see Enforcing validations on page 257 The following procedures describe how to create edit duplicate and delete a Site standard Creating a Site standard on page 250 Editing a Site standard on page 254 Duplicating a Site standard on page 254 Deleting a Site standard on page 255 You must have full privileges to create Site standards as descri
168. fied to exclude the pattern immediately following the from the result Where a pattern begins with the escape character backslash can be used to escape the and either include or exclude the pattern required only where is the first character For example to include occurrences of wip use the pattern wip whereas wip excludes wip must be the first character of the string In the expression first one the exclamation is part of the string first but is used to exclude the string one is evaluated literally in collection and filter definition fields 296 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Brackets Denotes different possibilities for a single character The brackets enclose a string of possible values In addition the following symbols can be used within the brackets denotes a range of characters used as the first character in the brackets to denote not Comma or Pipe Used to separate pattern matching strings enabling the user to specify more than one string the comma represents a Boolean OR host01 host02 host03 is evaluated literally in collection and filter definition fields character Character Any character other than one of the above denotes the specific character In case sensitive fields Control M Workload Automation differentiates between uppercase and lowercase characters a and A are regarded as
169. file system The file path must start with one of the following characters or Embedded script The script content is embedded in the Control M job definition which is in the Script text box The Script file name becomes informational only and does not have to exist on the target system Library Native only Defines the library name Up to 10 characters valid OS 400 Object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Script Embedded script only Enables you to type the embedded type script VT Script file Specifies the name of a script file containing the virtual terminal instructions to be executed Member Native Specifies the member name that contains the script file inside the script file when the script location is Native Up to 10 characters valid OS 400 Object name or one of the special values FIRST 131 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Virtual Terminal s parameters Resolve Special values Submission Attributes Print Screen images Spooled files handling Terminal attributes Defines a Program Script file or VT script file which may expect to receive parameters as input for the execution Each parameter must match its type as expected by the Program Script file or VT script To modify the parameters see Parameter display options The following types are available String Defines any string up to 4000 characters Decimal Defines a decimal number with
170. fine a job to use the resource exclusively or shared Control M verifies that a job is not submitted for execution unless the control resources required by the job are available in the Active Control Resource list and in the required state shared exclusive This prevents deadlock situations or contention between jobs 265 Control M Workload Automation User Guide EXAMPLE A job called DeductCharges requires exclusive control of a file called AcctBalance Control M only submits DeductCharges if AcctBalance is not being used by another job If another job also requires AcctBalance it is not submitted as long as DeductCharges is running The Control Resource management tool enables you to create the shared or exclusive resources in a logical list If the resource is shared other jobs can use the resource concurrently while jobs with exclusive resources cannot The following procedures describe how to create and delete resources in the Control Resource management tool Creating a control resource on page 266 Deleting a control resource on page 266 Creating a control resource This procedure describes how to create a control resource in the Control Resources management tool which is then used to allocate resources according to the job definition gt To create a control resource 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Control Resources The Control Resources management tool appears 2 From the C
171. fining a Gobel Conchtion Prefie In the Define a new Global Condition prefix field type a prefix To create a condition above the prefix without defining a Global Condition Prefix select the check box Click OK The line connecting the jobs is solid 7 To rearrange the jobs so that the predecessor is above the dependent job click 2 The dependent job second is dependent on the predecessor job first Control resources A control resource is a physical device that is defined by the control that a job needs over it exclusive or shared Data information resources such as files tables and databases are frequently control resources You can define a job to use the resource exclusively or shared Control M verifies that a job is not submitted for execution unless the control resources required by the job are available in the required state shared exclusive This prevents deadlock situations or contention between jobs EXAMPLE A job called DeductCharges requires exclusive control of a file called AcctBalance Control M only submits DeductCharges if AcctBalance is not being used by another job If another job also requires AcctBalance it is not submitted as long as DeductCharges is running Control resources are recorded in the Active Control Resources list as described in Control Resource management on page 265 The following procedures describes how to create copy and delete control resources 171 Control M Workload
172. finition Resource Modifies the quantitative resource on page 173 which represents a measure that can be quantified Maximum Modifies the maximum quantity of this quantitative resource that can be used by jobs concurrently according to one of the following settings Set to Increase by Decreased by At Sets when the event is triggered New Day time The time that the New day procedure is scheduled to run Time of day at which the job starts specified in hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock format HH MM This is based on the time of the Control M on which the job is run Calendar details click Advanced Applies to Service Assumption and Forecast BIM rules Calendar Details of the Control M and calendar to be used to schedule the job Period Name of one or more period for this exception definition which can be selected from a list Special month rules are not supported 231 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job Run Time rule The following table describes the Run Time rule which adjusts the estimated job run time by changing the percentage of the run time or the actual time Update Run Time Percent Modifies the estimated job runtime by the specified percentage and defines whether to increase or decrease the time Time Modifies the estimated job runtime by the specified fixed time value The time used is time of day at which the job starts specified in hours and minutes using the 24 hour cloc
173. following 241 Control M Workload Automation User Guide a peop a b Select a Hierarchy definition for the Viewpoint To edit the selected Hierarchy click The Hierarchy dialog box appears Type a name for the Hierarchy Type a description for the Hierarchy optional Select criteria for each level of the hierarchy You can define up to six hierarchy levels Click Save Update The Hierarchy is defined In the Filter section do the following Select a Filter for the ViewPoint To edit the selected filter click The Filter dialog box appears c Type a name for the Filter d Type a description for the Filter optional a b Define the filtering criteria o To Include or Exclude a set of criteria select or specify a field name relational operator and a value for example CTM Name ctmp1 o To delete a set of criteria select it in the Include or Exclude area and click Delete Click Save Update The Filter is defined In the Collection section do the following Select a Collection for the Viewpoint To create a new collection click The Collection dialog box appears c Type a name for the Collection d Type a description for the Collection optional Define the Collection criteria o To Include or Exclude a set of criteria select or specify a field name relational operator and a value for example CTM Name ctmp1 o To delete a set of criteria select it in the In
174. ge 79 p To add a variable see Adding a variable on page 80 h Define the scheduling of the job as described in J ob scheduling on page 150 g Define the dependencies of the job as described in Job prerequisites on page 166 h Define the actions of the job as described in J ob actions on page 175 i Click OK In the Mass Create dialog box click OK The jobs are created in the selected folder Creating a regular folder This procedure describes how to create a regular folder in a Workspace Before you begin Ensure you have successfully completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt 1 2 To create a regular folder From the Workspace tab New area drag and drop the folder template into the Workspace If the Control M Server Selection dialog box appears select the Control M Server for the folder you are defining and click OK A folder is created the Folder Type is set to regular and the folder properties appear in the right pane Click The folder properties are enabled for definition Set regular folder parameters as described in Regular folder parameters on page 143 The folder is now updated Creating a SMART Folder This procedure describes how to create a SMART Folder in a Workspace Before you begin Ensure you have successfully completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt 1 2 To create a smart folder From the Workspace tab New area drag and drop the folde
175. gs This table describes the Alerts options for customizing your settings in the Control M Workload Automation client New Alert Defines how Control M Workload Automation handles notifications when it Notifications receives new alerts Click one of the following Display tray notification toast Enables a notification bar to appear when you receive an alert Open Alerts Monitor tab Enables a new alert monitor tab to appear when you receive an alert Play sound Enables a sound to play whenever there is an alert External Programs settings This table describes the application settings for customizing your settings in the Control M Workload Automation client Application Defines the name of the application you want to integrate with Control M client Program Defines the name of the program where to run from Initial Dir Defines the directory where the program runs from For more information about the directory see Parameters Parameters Enables you to use job parameters from the monitoring environment For more information about the parameters see Parameters 32 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Advanced settings This table describes the general options for customizing your settings in the Control M Workload Automation client Presets path Defines the default location for filter presets You can click to select a different location Refresh quantitative resource list interval seconds Enables
176. gs when you log out of Control M Workload Automation Monitoring Enables you to apply confirmation settings for monitoring options as described in Monitoring on page 181 Periodic Statistics Enables you to apply confirmation settings to periodic statistics definition changes as described in Periodic Statistics definition on page 287 Presets Enables you to apply confirmation settings to delete preset definitions as described in Saving and loading a preset search on page 59 Quantitative Enables you to apply confirmation settings to delete resource as described in Resources Deleting a quantitative resource on page 174 Service Definitions Enables you to apply confirmation settings to delete a service or a rule as described in Service definitions on page 272 Enables you to apply confirmation settings to delete a template definition as described in Deleting a template on page 261 Workload Policies Enables you to apply confirmation settings to apply workload changes or delete Definitions workload definitions as described in Workload Policy Definition on page 280 Workspace Enables you to apply confirmation settings for various workspace options as described in Workspaces on page 37 Workspace Enables you to apply confirmation settings for various workspace manager options Manager as described in Workspace management on page 239 Templates 31 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Alerts settin
177. hat define when the job and folder runs including creating or using a Folder Rule based Calendar or selecting from a Control M Rule based Calendar which you define in the Calendar Manager but select as part of the scheduling You can also define when not to run a jobs by adding the Rule based Calendar to an Excluded Rule based Calendar list Job prerequisites on page 166 Enables you to set parameters that define job submission criteria that must be met for a job to run Job actions on page 175 Enables you to set parameters that define actions for Control M to perform based on various job run events such as specific output patterns and the job completion status Creating a regular folder on page Enables you to define containers of one or more jobs which enables 76 you to organize your jobs according to schedules or resources You can define as many folders as you need and assign each folder to a specific Control M Server For more information on the types of folders see Folder parameters on page 142 Creating a SMART Folder on Enables you to define containers of one or more jobs and Sub page 76 Folders which enables you to organize your jobs according to schedules or resources The jobs and Sub Folders in a SMART Folder for non z OS jobs can inherit definitions from parent SMART Folder Creating a Sub Folder on page__ Enables you to define containers of one or more jobs and Sub 77 Folders for non z OS jobs wh
178. hat another job with an Or relationship to the failed job runs successfully Service is late The entire service is late according to BMC Batch Impact Manager calculations Job ran too long One of the jobs in the critical service is late Lateness is calculated according to the average run time and the value of the Job Runtime Tolerance parameters A service is considered on time even if one of its jobs is late provided that the service itself is not late Job ended too One of the jobs in the critical service is early Earliness is calculated according quickly to the average run time and the value of the Job Runtime Tolerance parameters A service is considered on time even if one of its jobs is early 94 Control M Workload Automation User Guide OS Dummy job parameters The following table describes the General parameters for an OS Dummy job Job Type Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on the platform for the job run J obs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as post processing actions Value Dummy OS Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the j
179. hat are dependent on the selected job below the job Direct Relationship Defines the prerequisite jobs of the selected job and the jobs that are dependent on the selected job above and below the job Predecessor Defines the prerequisite jobs of the selected job above the job Radial Defines the jobs branching in all directions from the selected job Defines the number of jobs that branch out from the selected job Valid values 1 99999 Critical Path The critical path consists of the jobs in a Business Service that have the most impact on the completion time of the service The critical path is indicated in the flow diagram by special markings on the job hosts You can search for the jobs in the critical path as described in Finding jobs in the critical path on page 66 Finding jobs in the critical path This procedure describes how to find the dependent jobs in the longest path for a series of jobs gt To find jobs in the critical path 4 Ina Control M Workload Automation Viewpoint Analysis tab select Critical Path The Critical Path fields appear at the top of the Map view 2 Inthe flow diagram expand all jobs between the first and last jobs in the dependent group of jobs The last is a descendant of the first job but not immediately below it 3 Select the first job and then select the last jobs while clicking the CTRL key The first and last jobs are both selected 4 Set the Use and Overlapping Tolera
180. he following in relation to the job to be executed The JCL of the job The started task procedure Warning messages Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Library Defines the name of the library that contains the job s folder Member library For non z OS jobs File Path indicates the location of the file that contains the script For z OS jobs Member Library indicates the location of the Member that contains the J CL started task procedure or Warning message Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Host ID Node ID Defines the name of a Control M Agent computer remote host computer or host group where the job is submitted 42 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Service Name ogical name from a user or business perspective for the critical service BMC recommends that the service name be unique Run Time From Forecast only Defines the Average time for the job to run All Didn t run Estimated Run Time From and To Type Fr
181. he QShell environment S 38 Enables the job to run on the System 38 environment Script file location Indicates where the following script file is located Native QSYS file system The script file belongs to a physical file that resides in a QSYS library IFS Integrated file system The file resides in the integrated file system The file path must start with one of the following characters or Embedded script The script content is embedded in the Control M job definition which is in the Script text box The Script file name becomes informational only and does not have to exist on the target system Library Script file location Native only Defines the library name Up to 10 characters valid OS 400 Object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Embedded script only Enables you to type the embedded script Script File Specifies the name of the script file which is executed Path Script file location IFS only Defines the path in which the script file resides in The path name must start with or period Overriding path Script file location IFS only Defines the name of an alternate path or directory for the file specified with the Script file parameter Overriding library Native only Defines the name of an alternate library or directory for the file specified with the Script file parameter 124 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Script File s Parameters
182. he display and rearrange the jobs in on page 44 the map Simulate active jobs on page You can open your Workspace in the Forecast domain and check 223 that the jobs work as intended You can validate your design to ensure it implements business logic After you have tested various scenarios based on the Job definitions you can go back to the Workspace and implement the relevant changes 38 Control M Workload Automation User Guide View versions of job and folder The Version manager is a tool that enables you to view job and definitions and restore on page folder definitions for a specified date and time that corresponds to 178 your specified filter criteria A list of the matched definitions appears indicating the changes made to the item since the specified date and time Each definition entity can be reviewed from the Properties pane and then selected for a restore operation Multiple entities can be selected when performing the restore operation Transfer Job and Folder You can import jobs and folders from a XML file that you created and definitions between edited in the J ob and Folder File Editor Tool and then import it into environments on page 180 a Workspace as described in Importing jobs to a Workspace on page 51 Setting up a Workspace This procedure describes how to set up Workspace which enables you to define or review job flows in a Workspace Before you begin Ensure that you have the follow
183. he relative calendar days from start end of week start end of week Calendar The entity is scheduled according to the scheduling criteria of the selected Calendar as described in Calendar management on page 262 Order only on calendar days Defines the relative calendar days relative to the start or end of the week Order on calendar days except Defines the relative calendar days not included in the scheduling Week days Calendar days to order from the beginning of the week Periods Enables you to select different periods in a Periodic Calendar and the calendar days from the beginning or end of each period Order on Months on page 163 Determines the months that can be scheduled for processing Exceptions The following table shows the Exceptions for scheduling Select a day in the month to Schedules a job on a specific month day even it is not in the enforce a job to be ordered not calendar or excludes a specific month day even if it is in the ordered on that day calendar Select one of the following Order the job according to the calendar Order the job anyway n Don t order job anyway n 162 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Limitations The following table describes the limitations for scheduling Only if Week Days are Limits the scheduling criteria to specific Days of the week that are ordered Order on Months The following table describes the Order on Months Order o
184. he special values from the drop down list Job Description Defines the name of the OS 400 J ob description used to submit the job You can select a job description name from the generated list Overriding library Defines the name of an alternate library or directory for the file specified with the file name parameter Bypass job Enables the job not to run The following message is generated Job was bypassed Skip validity checks for this job Enables you to skip validity checks for all fields 130 Control M Workload Automation User Guide OS 400 VT Control M Virtual Terminal also known as Screen Scraper enables the execution of 5250 Interactive session operator actions from interactive menus and screen dialogs as a Control M batch job The interactive job then becomes part of your batch stream and can be executed by using all the Control M scheduling criteria You can access OS 400 VT from the job palette in the Planning domain or from the What to Run in OS 400 Full in the J ob Properties Pane in Control M Workload Automation For more details about OS 400 parameters see 05 400 Full parameters on page 110 The following table describes the OS 400 Virtual Terminal VT parameters Script file location Indicates where the following script file is located Native QSYS file system The script file belongs to a physical file that resides in a QSYS library IFS Integrated file system The file resides in the integrated
185. he started task procedure Warning messages Member Library File Path For non z OS jobs File Path indicates the location of the file that contains the script For z OS jobs Member Library indicates the location of the Member that contains the J CL started task procedure or Warning message Host Defines the name of a Control M Agent computer remote host computer or host group where the job is submitted Host Group Defines the name of a Control M Agent computer remote host computer or host group where the job is submitted Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Order ID Searches for jobs with a specific Order ID Job Status Determines whether to search for jobs that Ended OK Not OK or both Order Date From To Searches for jobs that were ordered between a defined period Duplicating archive search results This procedure describes how to duplicate archive search results from the current tab to another tab This enables you to perform another search with very similar search criteria without losing your original search results gt To duplicate archive search results 1 From the History domain in the Tools menu select Archive Search The Archive Search window appears Perform a search as described in Searching for archive data on page 218 3 From the Workload Archiving menu click Duplicate The duplicated archive search re
186. he urgency to Regular Urgent or Very Urgent There are two types of notifications e Notifications before job completion Notifications are based on various time For example jobs not being submitted by a certain time or a job s average execution time is or the job is not finished by a certain time e Notifications after job completion Notifications are based on a job completing OK or Not OK For more information see Creating Notifications and On Do Actions on page 177 On Do Actions Automatic interventions such as rerunning a job or ordering a remedial job if a job ends with a particular error code For more information see Creating Notifications and On Do Actions on page 177 Out Conditions An Out Condition is a condition that is added or deleted from the Conditions table after a job completes with a completion status of OK Depending on the settings Out Conditions are added or removed to from the Conditions table when the job ends OK The following procedures describe how to create and delete Out Conditions Creating an Out Condition on page 175 Deleting an Out Condition on page 177 When you remove a condition you can do the following Stop other jobs dependent on that condition from running Prevent a job from running again in case it is ordered again EXAMPLE A Job X has 3 In Conditions defined on an Order Date A B and C and 2 Out Conditions D A B C Job X starts running only i
187. heduling on page 151 142 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Regular folder parameters The following table describes parameters for a regular folder that is used to contain jobs SMART Defines whether a folder is SMART When the option is selected the folder has an extended set of folder definition parameters and can include Sub Folders To define a SMART Folder select the check box and see SMART Folder parameters on page 144 Folder Type Indicates whether the folder type is a regular folder a SMART folder or a Sub Folder Value Regular Folder Library Defines the name of the library that contains the job s folder Only z OS folders Folder Name Defines the name of the folder In the Properties pane this parameter indicates the folder where the job belongs Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Order Method Defines the method for ordering the entity as one of the following Automatic Daily When set to Automatic at the same time each day known as New Day time each Control M Server runs a procedure called New Day This procedure performs a number of tasks including scheduling the day s jobs and running maintenance and cleanup utilities The New Day procedures orders the folder or folder jobs None Manual Order The folder is not automatically ordered Specific User Daily dentifier used to assign the folder to a specific User Daily
188. hen System default is set the job will be submitted with the system default HOLD value Run priority Specifies the run priority for the job NOTE 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest The Agent only attempts to set job Run Priority after the job is submitted If a job is not available or ends before the priority is set the job is not updated and no error message is sent If the OS 400 configuration parameter CHGRUNPTY is set to N the RUNPTY of the job is not set Submit with ASAP option Enables you to submit the job to a NOMAX job queue If selected J ob Queue Library J ob queue priority and Hold on job queue are disabled Ignore all errors Script File Multiple commands and VT only Enables you to ignore errors encountered in any of the commands specified by the job The error message is logged in the job log and the processing is resumed from the next command Log informational messages Script File Multiple commands and VT only Enables additional informational messages logged in the job log when the job is executing 114 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Delete file Script File and VT only Deletes the script file or VT script file when the job execution ends NOTE This attribute is not valid when Script file location is set to Embedded script Advanced parameters for 0S 400 job The following table describes the advanced parameters for an O S 400 job Library list Enables you t
189. her environment You can also use the J ob and Folder File Editor tool to transfer job and folder definitions in a Workspace between environments as described in J ob and Folder File Editing Tool on page 180 You can import jobs and folders from an XML file that you exported or that you edited in the J ob and Folder File Editor Tool You can also import files in the crontab format Crontab is a UNIX scheduler whose job definitions are saved as a crontab file Control M converts the crontab file and imports the jobs into a Workspace The following procedures describe how to export definitions and import job and folder definitions from and to your environment Exporting jobs on page 51 Enables you to save your jobs and folder definitions or the whole Workspace as an XML file format Transfer job and folder definitions using an XML file editor on page 180 Enables you to transfer job and folder definitions by loading the jobs and folders from a Workspace to an XML file editor and after you are done editing the Workspace and saving the XML file you can import the XML file to any environment Importing jobs to a Workspace on page 51 Enables you to retrieve job and folder definitions from an XML file or a crontab file to the Workspace Exporting jobs This procedure describes how to export job and folder definitions to an XML file gt 1 To export jobs From the Home tab in the Workspace group do one of the following e To
190. hich other processes can access the file Special Values EXCLUSIVE SHARED PROTECTION Specifies the file operations that can be performed Special Values 1 0 INPUT OUTPUT Defines the length of the record in the program range 1 to 65535 Defines the size of the data block to be used by the program range 1 to 65535 140 Control M Workload Automation User Guide File Code Assigns a code to the file range 0 to 65535 Extent Size Defines the primary extent size and secondary extent size Define format J ob parameters The following table describes the define format for Tandem job parameters Mandatory Defines the logical name as it is known to the application s program Defines the class of the parameter Special Values CATALOG DEFAULTS MAP SEARCH SORT SUBSORT SPOOL TAPE TAPECATALOG Value Defines the value of the parameter The remainder of the attributes must be input as comma separated values Tandem job params parameters The following table describes the Tandem job Params parameters Mandatory Defines the name of the parameter Defines the value of the parameter 141 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Folder parameters J obs are sorted into the following types of folders Regular folder parameters on page 143 Enables you to define a container for jobs J obs in a regular folder are normally processed independently of each other each job is
191. ial changes to the system in the Forecast domain Use Control M Tools on page 237 In the Tools domain you can analyze areas that can be improved such as resource allocation and workload balancing in the Tools domain or you can use the tools available from the ribbon The following topics describe login profiles navigation and customized default settings Control M Workload Automation login profiles on page 7 Control M Workload Automation navigation on page 11 Customized settings on page 22 Control M Workload Automation login profiles The Control M Workload Automation login profiles represent the specific Control M EM GUI servers GSR that you use to connect to different environments This enables you to switch between environments without reconfiguring the hosts ports and server names Each GSR connects to the associated Control M EM servers For example you can set the GSR to connect to your testing development or production environment The following procedures describe how to log in to Control M Workload Automation and to create or change your login profile Control M Workload Automation User Guide Logging in to Control M Workload Automation on page 8 Creating a login profile on page 8 Editing a login profile on page 9 For more information about Changing the password on page 292 and other communication issues such as Connectivity problems on page 293 and Control M Servers Communication s
192. ibed in Forecast domain on page 18 Tools Enables you to analyze areas that can be improved such as resource allocation and workload balancing as described in Tools domain on page 20 Newsfeed Enables you to view a collection of Control M discussions from social networks blogs and forums such as Facebook Twitter and BMC Communities as described in Newsfeed domain on page 21 11 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Planning domain The following figure shows a Workspace in the Planning domain IA os B a T Rename Q Forecast Xua D show Changes Find And Ug A ommy QA feta Gh enn g gt nd e Order gt e 1 Copy i ajoa E gt 3 Folder Type Regular Folder Name Folder 4 ControlM Serv MPM800FP1 Order Method Order Method Automatic Daily Recenmectong Aterngt 1 120247 PLR Pecennactong ramemgt 2 126252 PAR 7 Network Overview WERESSSAREDOTE a 4 Error s 44 0 Warning s Info _ Job Folder Property Parent Path Descrpton 1 OS_Job 2 Runas Job Missing required fied OS_Job 3 Fie Path Job es OS_Job 3 Fie Name Job 164 system exception ID Dl omg org CORBA q 11 OS_Job 3 Runas Copy MEF Send Roundup otal Folders 2 Jobs 4 The following table describes the areas in the Planning domain in Control M Workload Automation 1 Ribbon Displays menus that enable you work in the domain find the tools related to the domain customize the v
193. ibes how to view a script or command which enables you to view the job s J CL or job script statements Before you begin Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 gt To view script 1 Inthe Viewpoint click on the job you want to view The properties of the job are displayed in the J ob Analysis pane on the right 2 Click the Script tab The script appears in the text box 3 To verify the J CL code of a z OS job see Verifying J CL code in an active job on page 186 In the Find field type a specific word to search from in the script From the Font size list select a font size to view the script 6 To set the script text to bold click B 185 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Verifying J CL code in an active job This procedure describes how to verify J CL code in an active z OS job which enables you to view and correct J CL code such as missing field values or other errors before re running the job Before you begin Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 gt To verify J CL code in an active job 1 Inthe Viewpoint click on the job you want to view The properties of the job are displayed in the J ob Analysis pane on the right 2 Click the Script tab The J CL code appears in the text box sA 3 Click The J CL Verification Report appears in the Results pane For more information about J CL Verify see Contro M CL Verify User Gu
194. ibute to use as part of the condition name The condition name is updated when the source and or target property is changed A user can choose not to update the condition names automatically by changing the links setting in Planning settings on page 24 Source property Job Name OS OB1 Fixed text TO Target property Application Accounting After this rule is defined in the Site standard and the Site standard is assigned to the folder the Condition Format rule is applied The Control M Workload Change Manager web user and the Control M Workload Automation scheduler modifying the folder with that Site standard will have to comply with the Condition Format rule you defined If they do not comply with the rule a warning error appears They can ignore or fix the warning error depending on the enforcement policy you set as described in Enforcing validations on page 257 249 Control M Workload Automation User Guide For more information on how to define a Condition Format see Creating a condition format on page 251 Creating a Site standard This procedure describes how to create a Site standard which enables you to set rules and regulations to Control M folder job parameters Business parameters and internal rules gt To create a Site standard 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Site standards The Site standards tab appears 2 From the Edit group in the ribbon click ew The Site standard appears
195. ic J obs to view problematic jobs in a service that have failed or ended late For more information see Analyzing problematic jobs on page 212 e Select Tickets to view incidents that can be monitored by BMC Remedy IT Service Management indicating that a critical service is problematic 203 Control M Workload Automation User Guide General service parameters This table describes general information about the selected service Defines whether the service is a BIM service If the amp icon appears the service is a BIM Description Provides a description of the service in free text A well written description can help you determine how the service fits into your workflow Shows the graphic and code that represents the status details Status Details Shows the status of the service as described in Service Status Details on page 213 Time by which the service must complete to be considered not late N Provides the text of a note that has been added about the services For more information about adding a service note see Adding a service note on page 214 Estimated End Time Shows the time when the service is estimated to stop running T o jobs i Jobs Without Statistics The number of jobs without statistic information Start Time Shows the timestamp when the service started to run Progress Shows the progress bar the percentage of the jobs that have completed in the service ote otal Jobs Number Total number of jobs in the
196. ice Log tab The log entries appear as described in Service Log parameters on page 212 4 To view problematic jobs related to the service do the following a Select a row and click a The Problematic J obs window appears b Click the Problematic J obs tab For more information on problematic jobs see Problematic J obs parameters on page 213 5 To view the Remedy tickets related to the service do the following a The Problematic J obs window appears b Click the Tickets tab a Select a row and click 205 Control M Workload Automation User Guide What If scenario simulation A What If scenario is a set of events that you can add to the scenario to simulate actions that can resolve service problems and analyze their impact on the active jobs before actually executing them Each individual potential change is called a What If For example you can use individual What fs to simulate the effects of skipping a job or changing the time frame of a job You can add What lf as described in Adding a What if event on page 206 When you add a What If the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint displays the effect automatically To emphasize that you are working with simulated jobs and not active jobs the background color of the flow diagram in the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint differs from the color in the Monitoring domain Viewpoint By default the color is light blue You can configure it to a different background color
197. ich enables you to organize your jobs according to schedules or resources The Sub Folder can inherit definitions from the parent SMART folder Example Creating a Control M Enables you to create a calendar that you can apply to all jobs in Rule based calendar on page 80 your Control M Server 73 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Example Defining a cyclic job on Enables you to define a job that is defined to rerun page 81 To test your design you can temporarily identify the job processing definitions as type Dummy which executes the batch flow without actually running the jobs For more information on Dummy jobs see OS Dummy job parameters on page 95 Creating a job This procedure describes how to create a job which defines what where and how a job runs Before you begin Successful completion of the following Setting up a Workspace on page 39 Checking out a Workspace on page 45 if you loaded folders A blank Workspace or an existing Workspace are already checked out Uploading agent utilities to remote hosts on page 80 if you use an OVMS agentless solution or for converting an agent to a remote host without changing your scripts gt To create a job 1 From the Workspace tab New area drag and drop one of the job templates from the New group Job Palette into the Workspace or an existing folder 2 Ifthe Control M Server Selection dialog box appears select the Control M
198. icular Control M Server see Creating a Control M Rule based Calendar on page 264 For more information on creating Folder Rule based Calendars see Defining a Folder Rule based Calendar on page 152 Defining a Folder Rule based Calendar This procedure describes how to define a Folder RBC which enables you to schedule a Folder RBC in a SMART Folder Before you begin Ensure that you open the Workspace folder that holds the job you want to schedule and that you select SMART folder as described in Workspace management on page 239 gt 1 2 3 4 5 To define a Folder Rule based Calendar In the Workspace select the folder Click or click the folder Select the Scheduling tab From the Rule based Calendar List click Select Folder Rule based Calendar To create a pre defined Control M Rule based Calendar see Creating a Control M Rule based Calendar on page 264 In the Rule based Calendar dialog box type the Rule based Calendar name 152 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 7 From the Schedule drop down list select a scheduling type as described in Scheduling options on page 157 8 To graphically view your scheduling click View Schedule Click More and set the Scheduling parameters on page 155 A Folder RBC is created and you can select it for scheduling J obs and sub folders can be selected in the folder for scheduling Cyclic jobs Job scheduling is affected by other factors
199. ide For more information about enabling the J CL Verify feature contact your Control M Administrator Applying adding conditions to waiting jobs This procedure describes how to apply and add conditions to waiting jobs which enables you to apply add conditions that the job is waiting for to execute Before you begin Before you apply add the missing conditions analyze the information as described in Projection on page 199 gt To apply add conditions to waiting jobs 1 Inthe Viewpoint click on the job you want to view The properties of the job are displayed in the J ob Analysis pane on the right 2 Click Waiting I nfo The Waiting Info data appears 3 Do one of the following e Click Apply All to apply all the missing conditions e Click Add to apply individual conditions The conditions are added to the Active Conditions list Finding the Enhanced Path This procedure describes how to find the enhanced path showing the predecessor jobs that are on the job Critical path and have not yet completed OK This enables you to analyze the job that is waiting to execute 186 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Before you begin Ensure that the job that you select has the Waiting I nfo tab in the Properties pane enabled gt To find the Enhanced Path 1 Inthe Viewpoint click on the job you want to view The Analysis of the job are displayed in the J ob Properties pane on the right 2 Click Waiting I nfo The Waiting
200. iew and analyze your flow 2 Find pane Displays a simple and advanced search for finding entities in your flow The results of the search appear in the Overview area along with results such as validation reports Main pane Displays the jobs and folders in the domain You can display the area as a Map or List Displays whether the job is new or updated 12 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Lists the entities according to the defined hierarchy in the View tab Domain selector Lists the various functional areas in the application where you can plan monitor view history forecast use tools and view Newsfeed Results pane Displays results such as results of Find and Validation report Show Changes results and displays the Network Overview The thumbnail version of the flow diagram currently displayed in the Main pane with the following color indications when the Main pane is set to Map Green new Blue modified Grey unchanged Yellow Control M Server Application and Sub Application Displays a window that reports the latest Workload Automation action and if it was a success You can also view the Action Report Help bar Displays a description of the selected job or folder field and enables you to select a link for more information related to the specific field New Alerts Displays a window that notifies you about events in your notification production environment and enables you to click on a link to open
201. in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In a non z OS job the Documentation depends on whether the type is File or URL For a file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Type Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL See the following URL Defines the URL address where the documentation is located The format starts with http ftp or file File Specifies the file that contains the job script Doc Path For a z OS job Doc Library defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is saved Doc File For a z OS job defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job the Doc File is the name of the file where the job Documentation is saved Priority Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database Critical Determines whether the job is a critical path job in Control M which ensures resources allocation order 96 Control M Workload Automation User Guide z OS Dummy job parameters The following table describes the General parameters for a z OS j
202. ines the default printer name for the job Up to 10 characters OS 400 name or one of the special values from the drop down list Defines the output priority for spooled output files that are produced by the job System default or one of the special values from the drop down list NOTE Highest priority 1 lowest priority 9 Decides whether the spooled files are accessed through the job interfaces after the job ends System default or one of the special values from the drop down list Defines the printed text at the end of each page or on separate pages String or special value Maximum length 30 characters NOTE f the string contains spaces or non alphanumeric characters enclose it with single quote marks Defines the spooled file handling profile name supplied when the job ends Must be the name of an existing spooled files handling profile that is located in the Agent Data directory 123 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Script File The Script File enables the job to execute the Script file specified in Script file that resides in Library or Path in the Special Environment CTMCL the Control M Script interpreter processes the commands in the script The following table describes the Script File parameters for an OS 400 job Special Environment Defines the following environment where the job runs Native Enables the job to run on the native OS 400 environment QShell Enables the job to run on t
203. ing and click Qs 4 To generate a comparison report do the following a Click Export b Select the destination folder and the type of document for the report The comparison report is generated and can be viewed Validating a Workspace This procedure describes how to validate the jobs and folders in a Workspace 48 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Before You Begin Ensure that you have completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt To validate a Workspace Inthe Workspace click Validate The Validation Report appears in the Results pane and the first job in the report is selected and appears in the Properties pane If no row appears then the jobs and folders are valid Verifying J CL code in a job definition This procedure describes how to verify J CL code in a z OS job definition which enables you to view and correct J CL code such as missing field values or other errors before running the job Before You Begin Ensure that you have completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt To verify J CL code in a job definition oY s In the Workspace Analysis tab select a z OS job and click 2 SY The JCL Verification Report appears in the Results pane For more information about J CL Verify see Control M J CL Verify User Guide For more information about enabling the J CL Verify feature contact the Control M Administrator Tracking changes in a Workspace This procedure describes h
204. ing authorization for folders to review Browse to edit Update gt To set up up a Workspace 1 Inthe Planning Home tab do one of the following Blank e To create a new job flow click Workspace e To create a new job flow from existing jobs click Load Folders and J obs and do the following a To filter the loaded folders and jobs follow the instructions in Filtering the loaded folders and jobs on page 41 b To select a hierarchy to view the loaded folders and jobs follow the instructions in Setting and changing the hierarchy for jobs and folders on page 44 c Select the jobs and folders that appear in the Tree View and click the Open drop down list and select Open or Open Copy e To continue working on a job flow click My Work and select a Workspace e To take ownership of a request click Unassigned Work select a request and click Take Ownership in the request as described in Taking ownership of a request on page 68 Control M Workload Change Manager 39 Control M Workload Automation User Guide e To view or work on a colleague s job flow click Others Work select a Workspace and click Yes to the confirmation message If you have the proper authorization you can take ownership by clicking Seay The Workspace opens Workspace lifecycle The following stages describe the life cycle of a Workspace which includes setting up checking out saving and checking in a Workspace Setting up a Wor
205. ing for confirmation Editing a User Daily This procedure describes how to edit the Order time of a Specific User Daily job gt To edit a User Daily 1 In the Forecast domain Forecast group select User Daily Definition The User Daily Definition dialog box appears 2 Select the user daily you want to edit and click The User Daily Definition dialog box appears 3 Inthe Time field set the time you want the User Daily to run The Specific User Daily job time is updated 226 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Setting up a Why analysis This procedure describes how to apply a Why analysis which enables you to view a simulation of jobs ona specified date based on job definitions gt To set up a Why analysis 1 In the Forecast domain set up a Forecast Workspace as described in Setting up a Forecast Workspace on page 224 In the Flow diagram select a job or folder and click o The Why lt job name gt window appears and the status appears in the right side To view available status information that does not appear click P in one or more of the following e Missing conditions e Missing quantitative resources The information is provided by Control M Control M Forecast 4 To add a listed condition click Add 5 To simulate a potential change click Add What if and select an option as described by What f scenario options on page 207 To view the effects of the enabled What If Scenarios section
206. int click on the job you want to view The properties of the job are displayed in the J ob Analysis pane on the right 2 Click Belongs To The relevant service and workload policy information appears 3 Do one or more of the following e To locate the job in the Viewpoint click Q e To view the service s definitions click You can also click Modify J ob to update the service definitions For more information see Batch Impact Manager job parameters on page 91 e To open the Service Viewpoint click el For more information see Business Service Analysis Viewpoint e To open the Service Monitor click 3 For more information see Service Monitor on page 202 e To view the Workload policy in the Workload Policy Name field type the name of the Workload Policy definition For more information on Workload Policies see Workload Policy Definition on page 280 Modify a job in the Monitoring domain You can modify a job s details in the Monitoring domain to solve problematic jobs that are obstructing the job flow as described in Modifying a job in Monitoring on page 188 When a job processing definition is ordered through New Day processing or manually a modified copy of the original definition is placed in the active jobs database To analyze jobs and manage job flows you can display and modify the processing details of the job in the Monitoring domain Take into consideration that the job you are working on a is copy of th
207. ion gt Control M Server gt Folder o Select only Sub Application The hierarchy is Sub Application gt Control M Server gt Folder o Select both Application and Sub Application The hierarchy is Application gt Sub Application gt Control M Server gt Folder o Clear both Application and Sub Application The hierarchy is Control M Server gt Folder Folders are displayed according to the hierarchy combination you selected To show or hide entities in the hierarchy do the following a In a Workspace select the View tab b In the Show in Hierarchy group select any combination of Application Sub Application and Control M Control M Server Depending on the check boxes selected the entity is enabled in the Hierarchy group If all three check boxes are cleared The SMART Folder and J obs appear enabled in the Hierarchy group To select the highest entity to display in the hierarchy in the View tab Hierarchy group select one of the following e Application 44 Control M Workload Automation User Guide e Sub Application e Control M Control M Server e SMART Folder e Jobs The jobs and folders in the Workspace are categorized according to the Hierarchy combination of selected and cleared entities and the selected entity in the Hierarchy Taking Ownership of a colleague s Workspace This procedure describes how to take ownership of a colleague s Workspace which enables you to review and edit job flows in the Workspace Before
208. irmation message click Yes 191 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The job is submitted Run Now Bypass options This table lists the Run Now Bypass options that appear when you select the Select option Time Limits Runs the job regardless of the Time From Time Until and Next Time parameter values The Time Limits bypass does not include the Time zone parameter That means that jobs that are waiting for a specific date will still wait for that date even if the Time Limit bypass is checked In Conditions Runs the job even if In conditions are not satisfied Quantitative Resources Runs the job regardless of whether Quantitative Resources specified in the job are available in the active list The Quantitative resource bypass also ignores the quantitative resource restrictions in the workload entities that the job belongs to Control Resources Runs the job regardless of whether the Control Resources specified in the job are available in the active list Workload Policy and Host Runs the job regardless of the restrictions set by the workload Restrictions entities Workload Hosts Mapping rules enforced on jobs with the Active policy are not bypassed Scheduling Environment z OS Runs the job regardless of the job s SCHENV statement only Pipes z OS only Runs the job regardless of whether other jobs using the same Pipe as that specified in the definition of this job are ready to run Quiesce z OS only Runs
209. istics for a group of jobs during a period of time that begins when the associated condition is added to the Active Conditions list and ends when the condition is removed from the Active Conditions list The condition can also be global to ensure that dynamic statistics are collected for the Control M Servers Before you begin Ensure you have successfully completed Creating a Dynamic Periodic Statistics definition on page 288 Statistics collected according to periods defined dynamically gt To generate Dynamic Periodic Statistics 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Conditions The Conditions manager appears 2 From the Conditions menu select Add Condition A new condition appears in the Properties pane 3 Inthe Condition Name field set the condition name in the form lt Condition Prefix gt lt single character gt as follows a Type the Condition Prefix that you set in Creating a Dynamic Periodic Statistics definition on page 288 b Type the Dynamic Period name by including it as the last character of the Condition name in the form 0 9 A Z ora 2 If no conditions are defined the statistics are collected for a period without a condition When more than one condition exists the statistics will be collected for the highest condition first lower case letters then capital letters and then numbers 4 From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server that hosts
210. ition You can add a script parameter as described in Adding input parameters to a script on page 79 File Path File Path indicates the location of the file that contains the script 85 Control M Workload Automation User Guide File name Indicates the name of a member that contains one of the following in relation to the job to be executed The JCL of the job The started task procedure Warning messages Host Group Defines the name of a Control M Agent computer remote host computer or host group where the job is submitted Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server that processes the job Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Parent Folder Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SMART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders Read only Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters Override Path Specifies a temporarily modified job script file without changing the original script file in the File Path Member library and without changing the scheduling order of a folder Pre execution Specifies a command to run immediately before
211. itions on page 167 Control Resource Enables you to specify whether the job requires exclusive or shared access to a physical resources such as tape drive as described in Control resources on page 171 Quantitative Resource Enables you to specify the resource in the Control M and for each job the quantity required used by that job as described in Quantitative resources on page 173 This does not apply to folder definitions When the scheduling criteria and all the job prerequisites are met the job can be submitted For information on ignoring prerequisite conditions set by a predecessor jobs that is not scheduled see Adjust Condition For information on job dependencies see Job dependencies on page 169 Setting user confirmation This procedure describes how to set user confirmation as a prerequisite for the job 166 Control M Workload Automation User Guide To set user confirmation In the Workspace select the job Click Select the Prerequisites tab Pe N gt Vv Select the Requires user confirmation check box as described in Requires user confirmation In Conditions An In Condition is a type of prerequisite condition that must be in the Active Conditions list for the job to run An In Condition is usually associated with an Out Condition of a successful completion of predecessor job You can do the following tasks Create an In Condition on page 167 Copy an In Condition on page 168
212. ization errors are resolved by using the Folder tool as described in Folder management on page 255 You can resolve conflicts by overwrite another folder or discarding changes After the Workspace is checked in the folders that were created and updated from the Workspace are synchronized with the J ob Definition database J obs are often used as a catch all term to represent entities that you define and monitor For example you define a job but a job is contained in folder and the scheduling is set by a calendar definition All the definitions are saved in a Workspace Job Definition Database A definition repository in Control M EM and Control M Server databases Depending on the synchronization settings between Control M EM and Control M Server the repository is logical If the two databases are fully synchronized then the definition repository is equivalent to the Job Definition Database and holds the current definitions of the jobs folders and calendars 40 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Active J obs Database An active repository of all Active entities in the Control M Server including Active jobs Folders Conditions and other Production Control entities such as active quantitative resources active qualitative resources and active workload policies Central Database A central repository in the Control M EM database that stores Workspaces that contain the job and folder definitions that have not yet been committed
213. k format HH MM This is based on the time of the Control M on which the job is run Defines whether to set to lt or gt For all jobs meeting the following criteria Control M Name of the Control M whose jobs will be included in this exception definition i Name of the application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Sub Application Name of the Sub Application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Name of the job that will be included in this exception definition Name of the member name for z OS that is included in this exception definition Name of the member library for z OS whose jobs are included in this exception definition Name of the container into which job processing definitions are organized Folder Lib Name of the library that contains the job s table Name of a host computer to which a job was submitted Identifies the user name for whom the job is executed Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Application Host ID Calendar details click Advanced Applies to Service Assumption and Forecast BIM rules 232 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Details of the Control M and calendar to be used to schedule the job Period Name of one or more period for this exception definition which can be selected from a list Special month rules are not supported Condition rule This table describes a Condition rule in which a conditio
214. kload Automation User Guide Determines whether to detect creation or deletion of a file as follows Create Detects creation of a file File size is ignored if the filename parameter contains wildcards unless the monitor file size when wildcard is used parameter is set to Y Delete Detects deletion of a file When the ctmfw utility is run in this mode it first checks for files that match the specified name After a specified file is detected the ctmfw utility checks at the specified interval for deletion of that file Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Min detected size Minimum file size in bytes This parameter is ignored if the FILE parameter contains wildcards unless the monitor file size when wildcard is used parameter is set to Y or if the mode parameter is set to DELETE Interval between file Interval between successive attempts to detect the existence deletion of a file in searches seconds Interval between Interval between attempts to monitor the size of a file after it is detected in seconds filesize comparison This parameter is ignored when using wildcards in FILE or when using DELETE mode iterations Number of iterations Number of attempts to monitor file size where the size remains static and greater than or equal to minimum detected size indicating successful creation of the file This parameter is ignored when usi
215. kspace on page 39 Enables you to define and review your job flow by working in a Workspace by doing one of the following e Create a new job flow You can create a new job flow by selecting blank Workspace e Continue working on a job flow You can continue working on a job flow by selecting a Workspace that you or a colleague previously set up e Load existing jobs You can load existing jobs and folders or load a copy of existing jobs and folders Checking out a Workspace on page 45 Enables you to create a working copy of the Workspace while you edit the loaded jobs and folders in a Workspace When you create a Blank Workspace the Workspace is automatically checked out Saving a Workspace on page 46 Enables you to save the Workspace to the J ob Definition database as a Workspace This enables you to work on your job flow from a client computer and reopen the Workspace You can continue defining jobs and repeatedly save the Workspace Checking in a Workspace on page 46 Enables you to commit new and edited jobs and folders in the Workspace to the Job Definition database During check in there might be a conflict or mismatch between the checked out data and the data in the J ob Definition database or a synchronization conflict between the definitions in the Control M EM and Control M Server databases You can resolve the conflict of Control M Workload Automation clients with Control M EM database during Check in Other synchron
216. l M EM and Control M Server troubleshoot connectivity problems and change the Control M Workload Automation password as described in the following topics Control M Servers Communication status on page 293 Troubleshooting connectivity on page 294 also see Connectivity problems on page 293 Changing the password on page 292 Batch Impact Manager Forecast Tools Forecast BIM rules on page 228 Enables you to manually revise the expected run time for a job by creating exceptions User Daily Definition on page Enables you to add a specific user daily defined in folder and specify 225 the Order time Other Tools Control M Configuration Manager Enables you to administer manage monitor configure and maintain all Control M components as well as defining security settings and user authorizations 238 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Reports Control M Reporting Enables you to define templates that you can use to generate Facility reports that provide important information about your Control M job flow Workspace management The Workspace manager is a tool that enables you to do the following Taking Ownership of a workspace on page 239 Renaming a workspace on page 239 Deleting a workspace on page 240 The same actions can be preformed on request Workspaces in the Workspace tool for Control M Workload Change Manager users Taking Ownership of a workspace This procedure de
217. l area select Workload Policy Definition The Workload Policy Definition manager appears Select the Workload Policy Definition that you want to deactivate From the Workload Policy Management menu select Deactivate A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Workload Policy Definition is deactivated Click Apply Changes A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Workload Policy definition is now saved in the Control M EM database 285 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Workload Policy Monitor The Workload Monitor is a tool that enables you to see the current status of associated jobs with a Workload Policy The following table describes the columns in the Workload Policy monitor Defines the workload policy name Wait Hosts Determines the number of jobs waiting for host resources due to one of the following reasons Agent or execution host is unavailable Host currently has its max number of jobs running Host has reached its max CPU usage restrictions Wait Workloads Determines the number of jobs waiting due to restrictions on the maximum number of jobs running concurrently in the workload policy Running J obs Determines the number of jobs that are currently running simultaneously In addition to the columns in the above table there are columns at the bottom of the Workload Monitor that show the number of jobs according to the column definition for all jobs in the Active environment The
218. l fields 136 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Tandem job parameters The following table describes the general parameters for a Tandem job Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on the platform for the job run J obs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as post processing actions Value Tandem Job Ty Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job pe m Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow Enables you to run jobs of job types other than Dummy as dummy jobs Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Name Defines the name of the process It must begin with followed by an alphabetic character Each remaining character must be alphanumeric Maximum 6 characters including the sign Defines one or more parameters which determines what the job runs What to run Determines whether the job runs as one of the following TACL Script Defines the job that runs the TACL script Program Defines the job that executes the program m as Defines tha
219. l the domains Background colors General settings Host Settings Enables you to set new alert notification options 22 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Confirmation Enables you to set confirmation settings for domains and tools settings on page 30 Notification Enables you to determine whether to receive notifications for actions from Settings the following tools Actions BSM Calendars Control Resources Folder Manager Forecast Show History Workload Policies Workspace Workspace Manager External Enables you to add application settings for external programs Programs on page 32 Advanced on Enables you to set the following Advanced options page 33 Preset path Action Report Reconnections Diagnostics on Enables you to set the following diagnostics options page ga Log levels Log files Newsfeed on Enables you to configure appearance refresh rate and proxy server page 36 settings for Newsfeed 23 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Customizing your default settings in the Workload Automation client This procedure describes how to customize your default settings in the Workload Automation client gt To customize your default settings in the Workload Automation client 1 From the Tools domain click D or from File select Options The Options window opens Select the option type on the left panel as described in Customized settings on page 22 Cli
220. l values from the drop down list Country id Defines the country or region identifier ID used by the job 2 characters country or region ID or one of the special values from the drop down list Coded character set id Defines the coded character set identifier CCSID used for the submitted job Up to 5 digits coded character set ID in the range of 1 65535 or one of the following special values from the drop down list 121 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Messaging parameters The following table describes the messaging parameters for OS 400 jobs Level Defines the messaging logging level used for the job s messages 0 4 characters or a special value from the drop down list Severity Defines the message severity used to determine which error messages are logged in the job log 00 99 characters or a special value from the drop down list Text Defines the messaging logging text System default or one of the special values from the drop down list Log CL program commands Defines whether the commands which run in a CL program are logged into the job log through the CL program s message queue System Default or one of the special values from the drop down list Inquiry message reply Defines how predefined messages are answered which are sent when running the job System Default or one of the special values from the drop down list Job message queue maximum Defines the maximum size of the job message queue 02 64 or on
221. lect the Workload Policy Definition that you want to delete From the Workload Policy Management menu select Delete A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Workload Policy Definition is deleted Click Apply Changes A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Workload Policy definition is now removed from the Control M EM database Activating a Workload Policy Definition This procedure describes how to activate a Workload Policy Definition which enforces all the rules of the Workload Policy Definition on the associated jobs gt 1 To activate a Workload Policy Definition From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Workload Policy Definition The Workload Policy Definition manager appears 284 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Select the Workload Policy Definition that you want to activate From the Workload Policy Management menu select Activate A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Workload Policy Definition is activated Click Apply Changes A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Workload Policy definition is now saved in the Control M EM database Deactivating a Workload Policy Definition This procedure describes how to deactivate a Workload Policy Definition which removes all the rules of the Workload Policy Definition on the associated jobs gt 1 To deactivate a Workload Policy Definition From the Tools domain in the Production Contro
222. lete determines when the critical service completes meaning the shortest possible time for one job Connecting jobs from the same Control M Server This procedure describes how to connect jobs from the same Control M Server in the flow diagram Before you begin Ensure you have met the following requirements Checked out Workspace In the View tab Display group Map is selected You can view both jobs that you want to be the predecessor and the successor dependent job in the Main pane A 5 The r drop down is set to Show Dependencies behind Hosts or Show Dependencies above Hosts To connect jobs from the same Control M Server In the Main pane select a job to be the predecessor job 169 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The Condition triangle appears at the bottom of the job AG enconmsz A SampleServicefillt 0S_jobea samples Sargia LA 2 Drag and drop the point of the triangle to the dependent job until the job outline is also dotted AR BNISY AR BKIS There is a dotted line drawn during the drag and drop After the drop the line is solid depending on your map settings as described in Map settings on page 29 3 To rearrange the jobs so that the predecessor is above the dependent job click A The dependent job second is dependent on the predecessor job first A SampieSoviocs IH Connecting jobs from different Control M Servers This procedure
223. llowing figure shows a Forecast Workspace in the Forecast domain X ose E Appenas CO OR lt Y View Versions Neighborhood Why Fi Refresh Update Open Save Gantt Schegule gt Piter View Analysis Workspace Scenano late DER Completed On Time ExcadeRdDa Folder 2 07 00 07 00 importFoider OnlyTuesdays fy SMARTI Pe a Enthan l Did Not Run 07 00 i 7 07 06 2 Ended Ok 7 Deadline Out Of Forecast Scope Stammen Running At End Of Day Testierts TomerTest 7 00 A Scenariol What If Scenario E Gj svssoorr Gj mvssooca PES ee eaten JONR Z Increase Job Run Time by 20 MAINOAY jo For al jobs TESTENC JOA Search resuts for I 8 x Y VTasha Bm Name Status Status Detats Estrate To Como Deadine Progress Prorty otal tems 40 Folders 6952 Jobs Last update on 31 Dec 12 16 13 35 The following table describes the areas in the Forecast domain in Control M Workload Automation 1 Ribbon Displays menus that enable you work in the domain find the tools related to the domain customize the view and analyze your flow 2 Main pane Displays the jobs and folders in the domain You can display the area as a Map or List or Gantt chart Lists the entities according to the defined hierarchy in the View tab Domain selector Lists the various functional areas in the application where you can plan monitor view history fore
224. load Automation User Guide Template functions The following table lists valid functions for use in a template Field Name Defines the name of a field in the job or group processing definition To indicate the Mem Name of the From ob and To ob specify Mem Name ToJob Mem Name Counter Incremental number to be inserted in the value This job is Job Counter numerical field Indicates an amount to increment decrement or multiply a number function quantity to add or in the condition name format This function can be used to reference subtract a previous or subsequent job J ob Counter 1 ENDED Substr Indicates a substring from a specified field or function as follows position length fieldname function position Offset of the substring within the field function zero based length Determines the number of characters fieldname Defines the name of the field function Defines the name of the function To indicate the first two characters of Mem Name specify Substr 0 2 Mem Name Editing a job template This procedure describes how to edit a job template which enables you to define the common values in a template and use the template to place those values into the job processing definitions Templates can be useful whether you are creating job processing definitions one at a time or creating large numbers of job processing definitions all at the same time gt To edit a job template
225. logs properties and tickets You can view a service s details in the following tabs General Displays the service definitions For more information see General service parameters on page 204 Displays the job s name description and type Service Log Shows information about changes in the service s status and the reasons for the respective changes You can select an entry and view details for the entry as described in Analyzing a service log on page 205 Problematic Jobs Shows problematic jobs in a service that have failed or ended late For more information see Analyzing problematic jobs on page 212 Tickets Displays incidents that can be monitored by BMC Remedy IT Service Management indicating that a critical service is problematic 202 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Analyzing a service This procedure describes how to analyze a service which enables you to analyze service data gt To analyze a service 1 From Monitoring Home select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears 2 Do one or more of the following e Select General to view the service definitions For more information see General service parameters on page 204 e Select Properties to view the job s name description and type e Select Service Log to view information about changes in the service s status and the reasons for the respective changes For more information see Analyzing a service log on page 205 e Select Problemat
226. low on screen instructions to resolve the conflicts Edit the XML file Enables you to edit the XML file in an editor that appears as a standalone Workspace window with a yellow background You can edit validate and compare job and folder definitions Save the XML file Enables you to save the changes to an XML file and not to the J ob Definition Database In fact all the functionality related to the J ob Definition Database such as Check out Check in Export Import Load Unload and Tools are disabled After you have completed editing the XML file in the J ob and Folder File Editing Tool you can import the XML file back to your environment or another environment and resolve conflicts as described in mporting jobs to a Workspace on page 51 If there are errors you must fix the error in the XML before opening or importing 180 bme Monitoring The Monitoring domain enables you to monitor the processing of the jobs perform critical user tasks handle problems and solve various issues Batch flows usually exist in a distributed system spanning many computers of different types By using Control M Workload Automation you can see the progress of your batch flows and identify problems and potential problems You can view and monitor jobs on a particular Control M Server jobs belonging to a specific batch service or specific application and jobs having a particular status such as failed jobs At any time you can view ac
227. m and in the number of jobs in a particular status c Click the J obs section The effects of the What If event appear in the flow diagram and in the number of jobs in a particular status 6 To disable the What lf clear the check box next to the What If 7 To disable or enable all the What lfs click 236 bme Tools Control M Workload Automation contains tools that provide enhanced functionality and gives you unlimited control over every aspect of job definition and execution in your environment The following table describes the available tools that you can access from Tools domain or from the Tools menu in the Planning Monitoring History and Forecast domains Options on page 22 Enables you to customize settings for the Control M Workload Automation client Planning Tools Calendars on page 262 Enables you to create a regular periodic relative and Control M Rule Based Calendar Folders on page 255 Enables you to view all folders defined in all environments upload Control M EM data to Control M Server download Control M Server data to Control M EM and order and delete folders Periodic Statistics on page 287 Enables you to collect separate statistics on a specific job or set of jobs based on a calendar period or a dynamic period that is effective only while the dynamic condition is active Service definition on page 271 used to model the Production for your end users Conditions on
228. me of an alternate library or directory for the specified subsystem Bypass job Enables the job not to run The following message is generated in the job s output Job was bypassed Skip validity check for this job Enables you to skip validity checks for all fields 127 Control M Workload Automation User Guide OS 400 External The OS 400 External job enables you to monitor OS 400 jobs created in external applications When attached to Control M external jobs can be released and or moved to another J OBQ changed to set specific attributes for example RUNPTY or changed to a new accounting code You can access OS 400 External job from the job palette in the Planning domain or from the What to run field in OS 400 Full in the J ob Properties Pane in Control M Workload Automation For more details about O S 400 parameters see 0S 400 Full parameters on page 110 The following table describes the OS 400 External job and external subsystem parameters Apart from the What to run and External Subsystem External job field the following fields only apply to External job What to run Run one of the following jobs External job External subsystem External job or External Defines the name of the external job name or subsystem name Subsystem NOTE When choosing External subsystem the Run as field is set to QSYS and becomes disables for input All parameters listed below applies to External job only Enables you to select
229. mmand lines to be executed You can move commands up or down in the list or delete copy or modify the command The associated Ignore error is moved up or down or deleted or modified with the command Enables a job to start a subsystem specified in Subsystem that resides in Library and monitors the active subsystem until the subsystem ends Subsystem ending code is always OK regardless of the method used to end it Enables a job to start a job description specified in J ob Description that resides in Library and monitors the job until the job ends This action is similar to Autostart J ob Entry AJ E in a subsystem description Enables the execution of 5250 Interactive session operator actions from interactive menus and screen dialogs as a Control M batch job The interactive job then becomes part of your batch stream and can be executed by using all the Control M scheduling criteria You can access OS 400 VT from the job palette in the Planning domain or from the What to Run in OS 400 Full in the J ob Properties Pane in Control M Workload Automation 110 Control M Workload Automation User Guide External J ob on page 128 Enables you to monEitor OS 400 jobs created in external applications When attached to Control M external jobs can be released and or moved to another J OBQ changed to set specific attributes for example RUNPTY or changed to a new accounting code You can access OS 400 External job from the job palette in
230. mmy as dummy jobs What Defines one or more parameters which determines what the job runs Determines whether the job runs as one of the following Script Defines that the jobs runs a script saved in File name located in File Path You can add a script parameter as described in Adding input parameters to a script on page 79 Command Defines that the job runs a command and includes the Command Embedded Script Defines that the job runs an embedded script and includes the lines of the Script and the File name You can add a script parameter as described in Adding input parameters to a script on page 79 For more information about remote browsing to select a file containing the script from the file path see Browse in an OS job for a file that contains a job script in a remote host or host group on page 78 Script Defines a script exactly as it would be specified in a terminal for the specific computer and is part of the job definition You can add a script parameter as described in Adding input parameters to a script on page 79 Command Indicates an operating system command line entry to be submitted as a job Use this parameter to specify an operating system command to execute by Control M The command must be specified exactly as it would be specified in a terminal for the specific computer Embedded Script Defines a script exactly as it would be specified in a terminal for the specific computer and is part of the job defin
231. n 0S 400 job For more information see Submission Attributes on page 114 Enables you to define advanced parameters for a OS 400 job For more information see Advanced parameters for OS 400 job on page 115 125 Control M Workload Automation User Guide OS 400 Multiple Commands OS 400 multiple commands enables you to execute multiple commands in a single job using the Control M Command line interpreter It enables you to create jobs with multiple commands eliminating the need to use pre and post commands It also enables an easier conversion from the ROBOT scheduler You can access the OS 400 Multiple Commands from the job palette in the Planning domain or from What to run field in OS 400 Full in the J ob Properties Pane in Control M Workload Automation For more details about O S 400 parameters see 0S 400 Full parameters on page 110 The following table describes the OS 400 Commands and Multiple Commands parameters Commands Multiple Commands only Specifies the command lines to be executed You can move commands up or down in the list or delete copy or modify the command The associated I gnore error is moved up or down or deleted or modified with the command Ignore errors Enables you to ignore errors when running jobs If set to Yes errors encountered in this command at run time are ignored The error message is logged in the job log of the job and the processing is resumed from the next command If set to No de
232. n Months Limits or determines the months that can be scheduled for processing Advanced Scheduling options The following table describes the Advanced scheduling options Days of Month Defines the following options with Advanced Days of Month scheduling rules Using a Calendar Enables you to select the calendar and view its calendar days Periods Enables you to select to order only on calendar days or to order on calendar days except For each period you can select calendar days from the beginning or end of each period Rules Enables you to right click and select any combination of the rules as described in Week Month Days with rules options on page 165 OR AND Defines AND or OR relationship between the Advanced Days of Month and Advanced Days of Week 163 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Days of Week The following options are used for Advanced Days of Week scheduling Using a Calendar Enables you to select the calendar and view its calendar days Period Enables you to select to order only on calendar days or to order on calendar days except For each period you can select calendar days from the beginning or end of each period Rules Enables you to right click and select any combination of the rules as described in Week Month Days with rules options on page 165 Specific Dates Defines specific dates month and day to schedule the job Order on Months Determines which month
233. n archived Viewpoint on page 216 You can set up an Archived Viewpoint to enable you to play back events in the from the History domain Filter the loaded folders and jobs on page 41 You can filter the archived Viewpoint by filtering according to a customized view Play back an archived event on page 217 You can play back events in the from the archived Viewpoint It enables you to review events from a specific time second by second or from event to event at the speed you require For more information about navigating in the History domain see History domain on page 16 For more information about Control M Workload Automation see Getting Started Loading an archived Viewpoint This procedure describes how to load an archived Viewpoint It enables you to review events from in a Viewpoint from a specific time second by second or from event to event at the speed you require gt To load an archived Viewpoint 1 Inthe History domain gt History Home tab Viewpoint field select one of the Viewpoints listed in the following e Recent Viewpoints e All Viewpoints 2 Do one of the following e Select Yesterday to view archived viewpoints of the previous day e Select All Days to view all available archived viewpoints Click the Viewpoint you want to load Click Custom Filter to filter the Viewpoint according to specific criteria For more information see Filter parameters on page 42 5 Click the Viewpoint to loa
234. n is added or removed at a specified time and does not depend on other jobs Update condition state Control M Name of the Control M whose jobs will be included in this exception definition The asterisk wildcard character can be used in the field to represent multiple values Condition Requirements to be met before a job can be submitted Order Date Time and day at which the job is ordered The valid values are in MM DD Any Date Order Date No Date The steps that Control M takes when the specified condition is met The valid values are Add default Delete At Sets when the event is triggered Average job start Start time based on existing J ob Runtime Statistics time New Day Time The time that the New day procedure is scheduled to run 233 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Time of day at which the job starts specified in hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock format HH MM This is based on the time of the Control M on which the job is run Calendar details click Advanced Applies to Service Assumption and Forecast BIM Rules Calendar Details of the Control M and calendar to be used to schedule the job Period Name of one or more period for this exception definition which can be selected from a list Special month rules are not supported Confirmation rule The following table describes the Confirmation rules which can be confirmed at a specified time and affect the calculation
235. n related to the job and is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the Documentation In a z OS job the Documentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In a non z OS job the Documentation depends on whether the type is File or URL For a file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Doc Path Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is saved Doc File is the name of the file where the job Documentation is saved Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database Critical Determines whether the job is a critical path job in Control M which ensures resources allocation order Type Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL See the following URL Defines the URL address where the documentation is located The format starts with http https ftp or file File Specifies the file that contains the job script 87 Control M Workload Automation User Guide z OS job parameters The following table describes the General parameters for a z OS job Job Type Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on the platform for the job run Jobs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as
236. n that you want to compare and click a The Compare window appears Compare the parameters of both jobs and then click Close For more information on comparing jobs see Comparing jobs on page 48 179 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Editing and Restoring a definition entity version This procedure describes how to edit and restore a definition entity version to the current version in the Version manager gt 1 To edit and restore a definition entity version From the Planning domain in the Tools menu select Versions The Version window appears Filter the definition entities that you want to view as described in Filtering definition entities on page 178 Select the definition entity that you want to edit and restore and click 4 The definition entity appears For more information on defining jobs see Creating a job on page 74 Edit the required fields and click Use The definition entity is restored Job and Folder File Editing Tool The J ob and Folder File Editor is an XML editor that enables you to move job and folder definitions between configuration environments The J ob and Folder File Editor opens jobs and folder definitions in a standalone Workspace window You can do the following as described in Editing jobs and folders in the J ob and Folder File Editor Tool on page 52 Create the XML file Enables you to load the data from a Workspace into the XML file If there are conflicts you can fol
237. nalyze jobs and manage job flows You can display and modify the processing details of jobs Perform actions on page 189 Enables you to intervene manually when special critical processes and potentially problematic situations arise For more information about viewing alerts services or further analyze business services see Alerts Monitor on page 201 Service Monitor on page 202 Analysis Viewpoint 181 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Setting up a Viewpoint This procedure describes how to open an existing Viewpoint and customize the view which enables you to monitor your active jobs gt 1 To set up a Viewpoint From the Monitoring domain click the tab and select one of the following e Recent Viewpoints e All Viewpoints The Viewpoints are listed in the Viewpoint list Do one of the following e Select one of the Viewpoints to display e To customize a viewpoint filter hover over one of the Viewpoints and do the following a Select Custom Filter next to the Viewpoint you want to customize The Customizable Filter window appears b Customize the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a filter on page 58 c Click Open The Viewpoint is opened To change the filter in an open viewpoint do one of the following in the filter field in the View group e Do the following a Click Customizable Filter b Customize the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a filter on page 58 c Click Open e Click
238. nce fields as described in Critical Path fields on page 67 5 Click J 66 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The results of the search appear in the Results area at the bottom of the Map view area The tab has the name based on the path the first and last node names the number of nodes and the average or last run time You can then view it highlighted in the flow diagram Gantt view or List view Critical Path fields The following table describes the Use fields of the Critical Path search The following options can be selected Average Run Time Defines the Average time in hhmmss format for the job to run based on the last successful runs of the job Last Run Time Defines the time in hhmmss format for the job to run based on the last successful run of the job Overlapping Tolerance The following options can be set when Use is set to Last Run Time Overlapping Tolerance check box Defines whether to take into account the maximum time of the end of one job can overlap with the start of the next job For jobs with no statistics the expected run time is 0 and does not affect the critical path calculation If the check box is not selected then the overlapping tolerance is not taken into account in the critical path calculation Overlapping Tolerance Defines the maximum time of the end of one job can overlap with the start of the next job For jobs with no statistics the expected run time is 0 and doe
239. nd colors Enables you to set the background color for the following Planning Workspace Monitoring ViewPoint History ViewPoint Forecast Workspace 29 Control M Workload Automation User Guide General Settings Display jobs in columns of Enables you to limit the number of columns with no links in a column Jobs with no links are placed in columns The following options are divided into Workspace and Viewpoint which enables you to set different values Viewpoint usually contains a higher amount of jobs than Workspace Display minus links Enables you to see deleted Out Conditions on page 175 dotted lines Display Dependencies raised by On Do action Enables you to see J ob dependencies on page 169 raised by On Do Actions dotted lines Display Optional Dependencies In Condition Expression as Dotted lines Enables you to display optional Job dependencies on page 169 which waits for In Conditions on page 167 dotted lines If there is more than one In Condition you may want to see the relationship of the dependencies At Start display all nodes expanded When starting job nodes are automatically expanded to include levels lower than the current selected host Node Settings These settings are divided into Workspace and Viewpoint which enables you to change the node fields First Display Field Enables you to select the information displayed in the first field of the node body of your workspace and or viewpoi
240. nd with the permission of OGC IBM Tivoli Business Service Manager IBM Tivoli Workload Scheduler IBM Cognos IBM InfoSphere DataStage IBM iSeries IBM Websphere and Al X are the trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States other countries or both UNIX is the registered trademark of The Open Group in the US and other countries Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Oracle and J ava are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners SAP R 2 and SAP R 3 SAP Business Objects and SAP NetWeaver are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries BMC Software considers information included in this documentation to be proprietary and confidential Your use of this information is subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable End User License Agreement for the product and the proprietary and restricted rights notices included in this documentation Restricted rights legend bmc o U S Government Restricted Rights to Computer Software UNPUBLISHED RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES Use duplication or disclosure of any data and computer software by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as applicable set forth in FAR Section 52 227 14 DFARS 252 227 7013 DFARS 252 227 7014 DFARS 252 227 7015 and DFARS 25
241. ness parameter can be used as a pattern part of a Control M folder job parameter Job Name Business Parameter Folder job parameters on page 246 Indicates that a folder job parameter rule can be used as a pattern part of another folder job parameter rule Job Name Application Internal rules on page 248 Indicates that an internal rule can be used as a pattern part of folder job parameter and a business parameter Job Name Internal Rule 1 9 characters Fixed text Indicates that a fixed value is used in the parameter as a constant string Free text Indicates that any value can be used in the parameter 253 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Length Determines the minimum and maximum length of characters in a parameter Characters Determines character restrictions such as which characters are allowed which characters are excluded the use of uppercase and lowercase letters and digits in a parameter Job Name 1 9 characters 4 amp Editing a Site standard This procedure describes how to edit a Site standard which enables you to modify the details of the Site standard There might be folders assigned to the Site standard you want to edit gt 1 To edit a Site standard From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Site standards The Site standards tab appears Select the Site standard you want to edit The Site standard opens Edit the details of the Site standard acco
242. ng environment For example if you have additional quantitative resources or a job is submitted earlier or later or give it more time to run View your jobs in various ways You can change the hierarchy the display and rearrange the on page 44 jobs in the map For more information about Control M Workload Automation see Getting Started Setting up a Forecast Workspace This procedure describes how to set up a Forecast Workspace This enables you to simulate your job flow to verify how your flow runs on a future date You can apply changes based on your analysis gt To set up a Forecast Workspace 1 Inthe Forecast domain click the tab 2 In the Forecast Home tab in the Date field select J 3 Select a date 4 In the What If Scenario field in the drop down menu select a scenario 5 To filter folders and jobs click Folders and J obs and set the filter fields as described in Filter parameters on page 42 6 To filter services do the following a Click Services b In the Services field select the services and click OK c To filter jobs click d Set the filter fields as described in Filter parameters on page 42 7 To set advanced filters do the following a In the Use field select one of the following versions of calendars o My checked out o All checked out o Only checked in b In the Job Run Time field select one of the following o Minimum o Average o Maximum 224 Control
243. ng reestablished Max reconnection retries Defines the number of reconnection attempts Control M EM should make The default is 5 reconnection attempts Wait lt sec gt seconds between reconnection attempts Defines the number of seconds Control M EM must wait between reconnection attempts The default is 5 seconds 33 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Localization Determines the language locale of the Control M Workload Automation client THe following languages are supported Deutsch English French Maximum Archived J obs in Search Results Determines the maximum number of search results that you can receive for each search request Compress Data on Save Compresses the size of the text file when you save a job log or output 34 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Diagnostics settings This table describes the diagnostic options for Control M Workload Automation client Log Levels Enables you to set the log levels as follows Trace Defines the highest level of tracing information which may affect application performance Debug Defines detailed information including the steps of an event parameters and for developer diagnostic information Information Defines information about the basic functionality of the application Useful information that helps you and support find reasons for an error Performance should not be affected Error and Warnings Error messages Defines errors that can caus
244. ng more information or modifications to the request Indicates that the request does not require any further modifications and is approved by the scheduler appears in the Workspace Manager The job flow is now part of Control M definitions In Control M Workload Change Manager the request is in read only mode and cannot be modified by the requester Notes Notes enable you to easily communicate with the web user It is a method of communicating information regarding the request and its entities For example if a request requires modifications you can return the request and add a note to the web user stating the necessary modifications You can add notes at two levels Request Note Enables you to add a note to the request as described in Adding a note to a request on page 71 Folder job Note Enables you to add a note to a specific folder job as described in Adding a note to a folder job on page 72 You can also view all notes from the requester as described in Handling requester notes on page 71 The notes tab includes the following 70 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Notes by requester and scheduler Notes statuses Notes timestamps You can also perform the following actions on notes Resolve Enables you to mark a note as approved if the note was handled by you or the web user as described in Resolving notes on page 71 Reopen Enables you to reopen an approved note I
245. ng wildcards in FILE or when using DELETE mode Monitor file size and Indicates whether file size should be monitored if the filename contains wildcards This file age when parameter is ignored if the filename does not contain a wildcard wildcard is used Time limit for the Maximum time in minutes to run the process without detecting the file at its minimum process size CREATE or detecting its deletion DELETE If the file is not detected deleted in this specified time frame the process terminates with an error return code Starting time for Indicates an absolute time at which the utility starts monitoring the file detecting files Absolute stop time Indicates an absolute time at which the file is no longer watched Maximal file age Indicates the maximum amount of time that can pass since the file you want to watch was last modified Minimal file age Indicates the minimum amount of time that must have passed since the file you want to watch was last modified Defines the Save button to save the J ob specific settings 103 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Host Group Control M Server Parent Folder Run job on all hosts in group Application Sub Application Created by Documentation Doc Path Defines the name of a Control M Agent computer remote host computer or host group where the job is submitted Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job
246. ning and Monitoring domains Control M Monitoring domain only Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Folder Monitoring domain only Defines the name of the folder In Folder Properties this parameter indicates the folder where the job belongs For more information on Folder properties see Folder parameters on page 142 and Order Into Folder parameter referred to below Library Monitoring for z OS only Defines the name of the library that contains the job s folder J obs Monitoring domain only Defines how to select the jobs to order as described in the following options All J obs Enables you to select all jobs Selected jobs Enables you to select jobs and folders from a tree view Mask Enables you to filter jobs Ignore scheduling criteria Determines if the job or folder is placed in the active jobs database regardless of the scheduling criteria Hold Determines if the job or folder is put on Hold as it enters the Monitoring domain This enables you to make changes to a job before it starts running Order as independent flow Determines if a flow in a folder is ordered uniquely This is only if you are ordering a single folder created in version 8 0 00 and later A unique suffix is added to every condition name See Condition management on page 268 Current working date Determines if the job or folder is scheduled on the current working date The date includes th
247. nitoring domain Before you begin Ensure you have opened a Workspace Setting up a Workspace on page 39 or a Viewpoint Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 gt To order jobs 1 Do one of the following e From the Planning domain do the following a Select the jobs and folders to run b From the Workspace tab select the drop down arrow in orse c Select one of the following To order specific jobs and folders select Order Selected Entities and click Yes 53 Control M Workload Automation User Guide To order all the jobs and folders in the checked out Workspace select Order Workspace and click Yes e From the Monitoring domain in the Tools tab select 2 Inthe Order dialog box select one or more parameters as described in Order parameters on page 55 3 To view the Folder Properties of the Folder you selected click B 4 Click Order The progress of the order appears in the Action Report on page 295 The status of ordered folders jobs and Sub Folders is set to WAIT_SCHEDULI NG After you order the jobs and folders the entire checked out Workspace is automatically checked in as described in Checking in a Workspace on page 46 The jobs that are included in the selected folders that are not in the checked out Workspace are included in the ordered entities 54 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Order parameters The following table describes the Order parameters that include ordering from Plan
248. nt The default for workspace and viewpoint is File Member Name Second Display Field Enables you to select the information displayed in the second field of your host body of your workspace and or viewpoint A third display field appears in 130 view size only Width Enables you to select the width of the field Confirmation settings The Confirmations panel determines which confirmation requests and warnings should be displayed for various options You can set alerts warnings and confirmation requests Confirmation settings are divided into sections 30 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Enables you to apply confirmation settings to update alert details as described in Alerts Monitor on page 201 gt o gt gt ot wn BSM Enables you to apply confirmation settings for BSM assumption changes as described in BSM configuration procedures Calendars Enables you to apply confirmation settings for calendar options as described in Calendar management on page 262 Conditions Enables you to apply confirmation settings for deleting conditions as described in Deleting a condition on page 269 Forecast Enables you to apply confirmation settings for loading large forecasts as described in BMC Control M Forecast Global Prefixes Enables you to apply confirmation settings for deleting global prefixes as described in Deleting a Global Conditions Prefix on page 270 Enables you to apply confirmation settin
249. nt to copy and click Duplicate The Service Rule wizard appears In the Name field type a new name for this service rule 4 Click Next and update the required fields in the Selection Grouping and Properties windows as described in Creating a service rule on page 277 5 From the Properties window click Finish Deleting a service rule This procedure describes how to delete a service rule from the Service Definition Manager gt 1 To delete a service rule From the Tools domain select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears Select the service rule that you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation message appears Click Yes The service rule is deleted 279 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Generating services from a rule This procedure describes how to manually generate services from a rule that was previously created gt To generate services from a rule 1 From the Tools domain select Service Definition Manager The Service Definition Manager window appears 2 Select a rule that contains the services you want to generate and click Generate Services From Rule The Generate Services Service Rule lt serviceRu e gt window appears 3 Select the service definitions that you want to generate and click Generate The service definitions are created and appear in the Service Definition Manager Workload Policy Definition The Workload Policy Definition manage
250. ntrol M Server or Assign existing Control M Server in the Version column select the Control M Server from the drop down menu After you resolve all conflicts click Continue The jobs defined in the import file are imported into the Workspace Editing jobs and folders in the Job and Folder File Editor Tool This procedure describes how to use the J ob and Folder File Editor to create an XML file load job and folders of the current Workspace to the XML file edit the Workspace and Save your work The Workspace is not saved to the Central repository but it is saved as the XML file you created This enables you to move job and folder definitions between configuration environments Before you begin Ensure you have opened a Workspace with at least one folder and job defined gt 1 To edit jobs and folders in the J ob and Folder File Editor Tool In the Workspace gt Tools tab Manage group select the J ob and Folder File Editor tool The Open dialog box appears In the drop down list next to the File name field select Xml File xml Enter a File name and browse to the location you want to save the file Select the file to import and click Open The XML file is is created with the data from the Workspace and is valid and no conflicts exist If the Import Error and Conflicts dialog box appears then there are errors and or conflicts If an error appears read the message and then do the following 52 Control M Workload
251. o define templates that you can use to generate reports that provide important information about your Control M job flow The File Watcher job type defines the ctmfw Control M File Watcher utility job to monitor file status and detect file processes as described in ctmfw File Watcher utility Supports running jobs on a Unisys platform that runs on an 0S2200 operating system You can submit OS2200 jobs for execution using command lines or a run stream Alternatively you can save your run stream as an embedded script in the Control M job definition For more information on Other Control M Agents see Control M Agent and remote hosts 83 Control M Workload Automation User Guide MAPPER 2200 0S 400 Full parameters on page 110 Tandem job parameters on page 137 Supports running jobs on other platforms and enable you to submit jobs for execution on the agent platform monitor the jobs and perform post processing analysis of output files The completion status of jobs and the results of post processing analysis are transmitted to the Control M Server For more information on Other Control M Agents see Control M Agent and remote hosts Supports running jobs on other platforms and enable you to submit jobs for execution on the agent platform monitor the jobs and perform post processing analysis of output files The completion status of jobs and the result of post processing analysis are transmitted back to the Contr
252. o jobs For more information see Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt To create Notifications and On Do Actions 1 In the Workspace select a job 2 Click 3 Inthe properties pane select the Actions tab 4 Select the action you want and click A window appears according to the action you selected 5 Define the On Do parameters as necessary For more information see On Do Actions The action is created 6 To set Output Handling set the Action field 177 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Version management The Version manager is a tool that enables you to view job and folder definitions for a specified date and time that corresponds to your specified filter criteria A list of the matched definitions appears indicating the changes made to the item since the specified date and time Each definition entity can be reviewed from the Properties pane and then selected for a restore operation Multiple entities can be selected when performing the restore operation The following procedures describe how to filter definitions entities view the version list of a definition entity compare definition entity versions and edit and restore a definition entity version Filtering definition entities on page 178 Managing versions of a job on page 179 Comparing different versions of a job on page 179 Editing and Restoring a definition entity version on page 180 Filtering definition entities Thi
253. o view and modify OS 400 job libraries For more information see Library list on page 116 Environment Enables you to view and modify the environment on which OS 400 jobs run For more information see Environment on page 117 Pre Post commands Enables you to apply pre or post commands to your OS 400 jobs For more information see Pre Post Commands on page 119 International Enables you to view and modify international parameters For more information see International parameters on page 121 Messaging Enables you to view and modify messaging parameters For more information see Messaging parameters on page 122 Output Enables you to view and modify output parameters for your OS 400 job For more information see Output parameters on page 123 Bypass job Enables the job not to run The following message is generated in the job s output Job was bypassed Skip validity check for this job Enables you to skip validity checks for all fields 115 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Library list You can view and modify OS 400 job libraries that are provided for Control M OS 400 jobs The following table describes the library list parameters Name space Defines the Name Space or ASP group Type or select the name space or a special value from the drop down list System library list Enables you to select the system portion of the library list to use System default or a special value from the drop down list Cur
254. ob Job Type Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on the platform for the job run J obs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as post processing actions Value Dummy z OS Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M for z OS that processes the job Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Parent Folder Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SMART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders Read only field Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job
255. ob was defined and how it fits into your business workflow Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Parent Folder Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SMART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders Variables All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll 95 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Documentation Defines a description related to the job and is saved
256. oblem For more information see Accessing the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint for a specific service on page 197 General Analysis Viewpoint The General Analysis Viewpoint enables you to focus in on one particular job and all other jobs related to that selected job by creating a dummy BIM service or to focus in on a specific application sub application folder or SMART folder and all related jobs All the relevant jobs are displayed in the Analysis Viewpoint together with additional information related to the BMC Batch Impact Manager BIM analysis This information helps you see the job estimated run times understand the critical path most important jobs and understand when the latest job in the selection will end With this information you can further analyze the results and better understand the running process For more information see Accessing the General Analysis Viewpoint on page 197 The enhanced Viewpoint enables you to do the following Active Job analysis on page 183 Enables you to analyze jobs and manage job flows you can display and modify the processing details of jobs in the Monitoring domain You can also modify certain details for a job run Intervention actions on page 189 Enables you to intervene manually when special critical processes and potentially problematic situations arise Service analysis on page 202 B M only Enables you to analyze services and manage service flows by viewing problematic j
257. obs hosts not included in the collection do not display Non pin collections may have a poor response time Reload active net Enables information from Control M to be updated automatically in Control M Workload Automation If not selected you must click Refresh in Control M Workload Automation in order to display the latest changes in Production 27 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Forecast settings This table describes the Forecast options for customizing your settings in the Control M Workload Automation client Color Settings Enables you to choose the color settings for the job hosts in the forecast flow diagram for executed and not executed jobs Forecast Calendar Start day of the week Enables you to select the day of the week on which a business week starts in the Forecast multiple hosts calendar display Maximum J obs per Forecast Action Enables you to set the maximum number of jobs included in the Forecast multiple hosts calendar display Display Display Execution Time Enables you to chose a time reference when displaying the execution time in the job host or Gantt chart by selecting local time or the time according to the Control M Server Display Seconds in Execution time Enables you to view the execution time in seconds Business Service Critical Path Defines the job path that has the most impact on the completion time of the service by displaying according to the following options Show compl
258. obs view service logs properties and Remedy tickets Apply a projection on page 200 Enables you to simulate the job status so you can get specific information about missing prerequisites or unavailable resources You can ensure that you add more resources or satisfy the prerequisite or manually add in the Waiting Info tab as described in Applying adding conditions to waiting jobs on page 186 Search for jobs on page 57 Enables you to find jobs and services with specific filters Edit Forecast BIM rule on page 229 B M only Enables you to edit exceptions that affect the expected job run times Editing a Service Assumption on page 215 B M only Enables you to edit exceptions that affect the expected job run times of a specific service In addition the Viewpoint contains the following views 196 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Service Monitor Live 8 only Displays current information about the analyzed service and a summary of the services in the enterprise When What Ifs are added the Business Services Live area shows the impact of the What Ifs on the simulation For more information see Service Monitor live parameters on page 198 Analysis Viewpoint I nformation Displays current information about the selected entity and a summary of the related entities in the enterprise For more information see Analysis Viewpoint Information on page 198 Dashboard Displays a mini dashboard with job inf
259. ocumentation is in a Doc Member located in a Doc Library In a non z OS job the Documentation depends on whether the type is File or URL For a file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL See the following URL Defines the URL address where the documentation is located The format starts with http ftp or file a File Specifies the file that contains the job script For a z OS job Doc Library defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is saved 104 Control M Workload Automation User Guide For a z OS job defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job the Doc File is the name of the file where the job Documentation is saved Priority Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database Critical Determines whether the job is a critical path job in Control M which ensures resources allocation order 105 Control M Workload Automation User Guide OS2200 parameters The following table describes OS2200 parameters Job Type Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on
260. of one or more jobs that are aggregated based on job filtering criteria Order date SMART folder or a job as described in Service definitions on page 272 Service Rules A service rule is a service generation definition that enables you to manually or automatically generate services as described in Service rules on page 276 Service definitions A service is a group of one or more jobs that are aggregated based on job filtering criteria Order date SMART folder or a job You can create a service definition which enables the service to appear in Control M Self Service when a job that belongs to the service appears in Active J obs The following procedures describe how to create edit copy and delete service definitions Creating a service definition on page 272 Editing a service definition on page 273 Copying a service definition on page 274 Deleting a service definition on page 274 Creating a service definition This procedure describes how to create a service definition in the Control M Workload Automation client gt To create a service definition 1 Open the Control M Workload Automation client 2 From the Tools domain select Service Definitions The Service Definition window appears 3 Select New Service Definition The Service Definition dialog box appears In the Name and Description fields type the name and description of the service Select one of the options described in Service options on
261. ol M Server You can view and modify the following OS 400 type of jobs External Full Multiple Commands Program VT For more information on Other Control M Agents see Control M Agent and remote hosts Supports running jobs on other platforms and enables you to define jobs retrieve job parameters and control jobs running on the Guardian operating system For more information on Other Control M Agents see Control M Agent and remote hosts Defines job fields for Application Plug ins such as SAP Oracle E Business Suite or IBM Cognos For information on the relevant Application Plug in see Application Plug ins 84 Control M Workload Automation User Guide OS job parameters The following table describes the General parameters for an OS job Job Type Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on the platform for the job run J obs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as post processing actions Value OS Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow Enables you to run jobs of job types other than Du
262. ol M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Parent Folder Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SMART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders Read only Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters om oO 100 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Run job on all hosts Specifies that job submission details be broadcast to all agents within a defined Host in group Group All available agents in the Host Group run an identical job and each such job has a unique Order ID All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Do
263. older RBC Sub Folder You can select from a list of Folder RBCs or Control M RBCs that are defined in the parent SMART folder to add to the RBC list and select Control M RBCs to be added to Excluded RBC list Jobina SMART Folder You can select from a list of Folder RBCs or Control M RBCs that are defined in the parent SMART folder to add to the RBC list and select Control M RBCs to be added to Excluded RBC list Jobin a regular folder You can select Control M RBCs to be added to the RBC list and the Excluded RBC list For more information on Control M Rule Based Calendars see Calendar management on page 262 For more information on defining a Folder Rule based Calendar see Defining a Folder Rule based Calendar on page 152 For more information on defining a Control M Rule based Calendar see Creating a Control M Rule based Calendar on page 264 Defines scheduling options that are based on specific calendars For more information see Based on Calendar on page 160 Defines specific dates for the schedule up to 12 dates Control M for z OS only The following fields are defined Partition Data set Defines the name of a partitioned data set to check for free space If the Partition Data Set has fewer than the minimum number of required free tracks as specified for the Minimum number of tracks parameter the job is executed Minimum number of tracks Minimum number of free partitioned data set tracks requi
264. om Forecast only Defines the following types of jobs or whether it is part of a BIM service or critical path m Cyclic Defines the Cyclic Tasktype CYC for a z OS job Critical Determines whether the job is a critical path job in Control M which ensures resources allocation order as described in Critical Emergency Defines the Emergency Tasktype EMR for a z OS job Part of Business Service Defines if the job is part of a BIM service as described in Analyzing what service the job belongs to on page 187 Part of Critical Path Defines if the job is part of the critical path as described in Critical Path on page 66 Advanced From Forecast only Defines an area in the Filters dialog box where you define more filter rules Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow In Condition Date From Forecast only Specifies prerequisite conditions that must be satisfied before the job is submitted for execution The In Conditions parameter makes the submission of the job dependent on the existence of one or more prerequisite conditions Out Condition Date From Forecast only Specifies prerequisite conditions to be added or deleted after the job completes with a completion status of OK Control Resource Type From Forecast only Indicates the resources required by the
265. omain You can display the area as a Map or List 14 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Results pane Displays results such as results of Find and Validation report Show Changes results and displays the Network Overview The thumbnail version of the flow diagram currently displayed in the Main pane with the following color indications when the Main pane is set to Map Green new Blue modified Grey unchanged Yellow Control M Server Application and Sub Application Status bar Displays information about the flow diagram In the Service Monitor it displays information about the status of services Notification bar Displays a window that reports the latest Workload Automation action and if it was a success You can also view the Action Report Properties pane Displays the properties of the selected entity You can also view analysis information can from this pane 15 Control M Workload Automation User Guide History domain The following figure shows an Archived Viewpoint in the History domain ad By J D i t 2 Mus Expand Rearrange Hierarchy An View 3 E amsoooora FA fou gt 9 Search In at enteses amp No Appkatx A ameoocora j No Subs a e IW foden A W No Application _ __ OSo Testi ERE ae Job Name OS_Job 1 utr Descrption daws What 4 e Command _seep 10 ut ar Where uter Host ControlM Ser ctm800oorca Who Run As emuser
266. one of the following filters o All Active Jobs o All jobs o Ended Not OK o Ended OK o Waiting Jobs The Viewpoint is filtered according to your selections 182 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Active J ob analysis To help you analyze jobs and manage job flows you can display and modify the processing details of jobs in the Monitoring domain You can also modify certain details for that job run You can view a job s details in the following tabs Synopsis Shows fields such as start time and end time order ID order date status attributes of the selected job as described in J ob definition on page 73 Waiting Info Displays the reasons why the job has not yet been executed and enables you to intervene as needed For more information see Analyzing active jobs on page 184 Script Displays the job script statements or a z OS job s J CL code as described in Analyzing a script on page 185 For more information on verifying the J CL code see Verifying J CL code in an active job on page 186 log Displays the activity log of the selected job Belongs To Displays what service and Workload Policy the job belongs For more information see Analyzing what service the job belongs to on page 187 Output Displays the job s Output as described in Analyzing Output of an active job on page 187 Displays statistics of the job s latest runs Documentation Displays a description related to the job and is
267. ons and click Advanced to set the calendar details e Quantitative Resource rule on page 231 e Job Run Time rule on page 232 e Condition rule on page 233 e Confirmation rule on page 234 Click OK The rule appears in the left pane Do one of the following e To enable the rule select the check box next to the rule e To disable the rule clear the check mark next to the rule Repeat steps 3 6 as needed for the rules 229 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 8 Add rules as described in Creating a Forecast BIM rule on page 228 9 Click Save The Forecast BIM rules you edited are saved and the checked ones are enabled Deleting a Forecast BIM rule This procedure describes how to delete a Forecast BIM rule gt To delete a Forecast BIM rule 1 Inthe Forecast domain click the tab 2 In the Forecast Home tab click Forecast BI M Rules The Forecast BIM Rules window appears 3 In the left pane select one of the rules The fields appear in the right pane x Click Delete Update the fields as described in the following field descriptions and click Advanced to set the calendar details 230 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Quantitative Resource rule The following table describes the fields to adjust the quantitative resource at a specified time Update quantitative resource maximum quantity Control M Name of the Control M whose jobs are included in this exception de
268. ons menu select Delete Condition A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes The condition is deleted Global Conditions Prefixes You can also define global prerequisites to establish job dependencies across different Control M Servers by defining condition name prefixes that indicate that a condition is global The following procedures describe how to create and delete global condition prefixes in the Global Conditions Prefixes manager Creating a Global Conditions Prefix on page 269 Deleting a Global Conditions Prefix on page 270 For more information on setting up dependencies between jobs from different Control M Servers see Connecting jobs from different Control M Servers on page 170 Creating a Global Conditions Prefix This procedure describes how to create a Global Conditions prefix which is then used to create dependencies between jobs in different Control M Servers gt To create a Global Conditions Prefix 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Global Conditions Prefixes The Global Conditions Prefixes manager appears 2 From the Conditions tab select Add Condition A new condition properties pane appears on the Properties pane Set the fields as described in Global Condition prefixes on page 271 Click Save 269 Control M Workload Automation User Guide The condition prefix appears in the table Deleting a Global Conditions Prefix This procedure describes how to
269. ons section click The Condition Details window appears In the Name field type a name for the In Condition From the Order Date drop down list select the order date for the job to run Click OK In the Properties pane from the Conditions Relationship drop down list select the relationship between conditions oN oi 9 If you select Set Manually double click the condition and in the Condition Details window define the following a If you want to add brackets from the Opening Bracket and Closing Bracket drop down lists select the brackets b From the Relationship drop down list select the relationship between the In Conditions The In Condition is created Copying an In Condition This procedure describes how to copy an In Condition for a job which enables you to create a new In Condition from an existing one gt To copy an In Condition 1 In the Workspace select the job 2 Click 3 Inthe Properties pane select the Prerequisites tab 4 From the In Conditions list select the In Condition to copy 5 Click BY The In Condition is copied and appears in the In Conditions list Deleting an In Condition This procedure describes how to delete an In Condition for a job which enables you to remove an In Condition from the In Conditions list gt To delete an In Condition 1 In the Workspace select the job 2 Click 3 In the Properties pane select the Prerequisites tab 4 From the In
270. ontrol M Workload Automation User Guide To add a note to a request In the request in the bottom pane click the Notes tab The Notes information appears in the bottom pane Click on the request note The note text appears in the right pane In the Add new note text box add your note The note is added and is attached to the request after the request is returned to the web user Adding a note to a folder job This procedure describes how to add a note to a folder job which enables you to write information about the folder job to the web user gt 1 To add a note to a folder job In the request select the folder job The properties pane appears on the right Click In the Add new note text box add your note The note is added to the folder job and is attached to the folder job after the request is returned to the web user 72 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job definition A job definition contains job processing information which defines what where and how a job runs For example the job might run a script on a particular computer The following procedures describe some of the procedures that are used in the process Creating a job on page 74 Enables you to define a job that includes the following types of parameters Job types on page 83 Enables you to set parameters that define what how and where the specific jobs type runs Job scheduling on page 150 Enables you to set options t
271. ontrol Resources menu select Add Resource A new control resource appears on the right 3 Do the following a In the Resource Name field type a name for the resource b From the Type drop down list select one of the following o Shared Enables multiple jobs to use this resource concurrently o Exclusive Enables a single job to use this resource c From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server that hosts the resource 4 Click Save The resource appears in the Active Control Resource list Deleting a control resource This procedure describes how to delete a control resource in the Control Resources management tool After the resource is deleted all jobs that require the resource cannot run gt To delete a control resource 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Control Resources The Control Resources management tool appears 2 From the Control Resources menu select Delete Resource A confirmation message appears 266 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 3 Click Yes The Control Resource is deleted from the Active Control Resource list Quantitative Resource management A quantitative resource is a resource that represents a measure that can be quantified such as percentage of CPU megabytes of storage or number of tape drives Control M verifies that a job is not submitted for execution unless the quantitative resources required by the job are available in the Ac
272. open viewpoint Defines how to automatically open a viewpoint by selecting one on the following Select Last Viewpoint Display Open viewpoint dialog Leave the field unchecked to display an empty Viewpoint when you start a session Select Enables you to automatically open a viewpoint by filtering your criteria by selecting one of the following from the drop down list All Active J obs By Application By Description By Owner By Status By Folder By lt name of your saved viewpoint gt Last Viewpoint Enables you to open the last opened viewpoint from the previous session Display Open Enables you to open the viewpoint dialog box allowing you to view a viewpoint ViewPoint dialog _ dialog box for the current session 26 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Open into Local View Automatic refresh Enables the job that prompts an alert and the jobs having a dependency relationship with that job to display in a Viewpoint Use Radius of Defines the level of dependencies where jobs are selected and displayed in a Viewpoint Viewpoint Name Defines the Viewpoint into which the jobs should be displayed You can chose one of the following All Active J obs All Jobs By Application By Description By Owner By Status By Folder By lt name of your saved viewpoint gt BMC Software recommends that you choose a viewpoint containing All jobs If you choose a viewpoint that does not have a collection of all j
273. or without decimal point The value is passed to the program as packed decimal with a length of 15 5 where the value is 15 digits long of which 5 digits are decimal positions Hex Specifies any even number of hexadecimal characters 0 9 a f A F The value is passed to the program as X lt value gt NOTE The String is the only valid type to be passed to Script file or VT script file and also to a QShell program A maximum of 99 parameters can be set per job If you need to include single quote character it must be 2 single quotes Indicates whether special values such as PGM DTAARA and FILE defined in the program s parameters value will be resolved by the script interpreter or prior to submitting a program The default value is Yes checked For more details about OS 400 special values see Reso ving parameters with special values in the Control M Agent for iSeries AS 400 Administrator guide Enables you to define submission attribute parameters for an 0S 400 job For more information see Submission Attributes on page 114 Choose which screen images are printed into the job s output System default No Yes Input only output only Job PRTKEYFMT Specifies the name of the spooled file handling profile to be processed when the job ends Defines the Virtual terminal parameters 132 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Work station type Defines the type of workstation to use Select th
274. order appears in the Action Report The status of ordered folders is set to WAIT_SCHEDULING SMART folders only Deleting a folder This procedure describes how to delete a folder in the Folder manager gt To delete a folder 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Folders The Folder manager appears 2 Select the folder that you want to delete and click Delete 256 Control M Workload Automation User Guide A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes The folder is deleted Assigning a Site standard to a folder folders This procedure describes how to assign a Site standard to a folder folders from the Folder tool For more information on Site standards see Site standards management on page 245 gt To assign a Site standard to a folder folders 1 From the Tools domain select Folders The Folders tab appears 2 Do one of the following e Ifyou want to assign a Site standard to one folder select the folder and click g e f you want to assign a Site standard to multiple folders select all folders and click g The Set Site standard window appears 3 Do one of the following e f you selected one folder do the following a From the Site standard drop down list select the Site standard b Select the Business parameters if any and assign the value e f you selected more than one folder do the following c Select the Site standards and Business Fields area check box and then select the Site standa
275. ormation and buttons for frequently used service actions For more information see Analysis Viewpoint Dashboard parameters on page 199 Business Services What If Scenario 8 M only Enables you to simulate actions that can resolve service problems and analyze their impact on the active environment before actually executing them For more information see Create a What if scenario on page 206 To access the Analysis Viewpoint see Accessing the General Analysis Viewpoint on page 197 For more information on viewing services from the Control M Self Service web interface see Control M Self Service Accessing the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint for a specific service This procedure describes how to access the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint which enables you to monitor and analyze a specific service gt 1 To access the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint for a specific service From the Tools domain select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears 2 f The Business Service Analysis Viewpoint appears Do one or more of the following e Click Business Services to view Service Monitor Live Business Service Dashboard and What If Scenario For more information see Business Service Analysis Viewpoint e Click Details to display the jobs with additional analysis information For more information see Service Monitor on page 202 Accessing the General Analysis Viewpoint This procedure describes how to acc
276. otal jobs in Service The number of jobs in the service J obs in Critical Path The number of jobs in Critical Path Without Statistics The number of jobs without statistic information Jobs with Time Gap The number of jobs that have a time difference between an estimated job start time and the time when all of its predecessors are finished Since a job with a time gap is not predicted to start immediately after its predecessor jobs have completed it is possible to re schedule the job to start earlier than its original scheduled time The best practice is to begin by adjusting the start time of the first job with a time gap in the critical path thereby allowing the service to end earlier The number of jobs with service a For more information see Editing a Service Assumption on page 215 Projection A Projection provides detailed information that is gathered by the BMC Batch Impact Manager BIM about why jobs are estimated to run as displayed on the job hosts The details can be obtained for a specific job or a number of jobs based on the Active jobs The Projection window shows the last constraint that prevents the selected job from running in addition to the start and end times of the job This enables you to determine how to start jobs earlier so that services can complete on time The Projection window is available for any job even jobs that do not belong to services and from any Viewpoint not just the Business Analysis viewpoint
277. ow to track changes in a Workspace which enables you to track which jobs folders are added modified and deleted Before You Begin Ensure that you have completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt To track changes in a Workspace 1 In the Workspace from the Edit area click E Show Changes l The list of changes appears in the Results pane 2 Select the job folder The job folder properties pane is displayed on the right You can modify the job folder as described in Editing a job on page 75 and Editing a folder on page 78 You can click on the column headings to filter the changes according to that column such as Change Type 49 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Conflict Resolution Conflicts can occur when multiple users are working on the same Workspaces folders or jobs You might change properties of an entity or delete it from the Workspace To bring these conflicts to your attention the conflicts are displayed in the following ways Check in conflicts Conflicts are displayed as errors and or warnings If an error is found the process is canceled and the conflict must be resolved Warnings are just displayed for your awareness but will not cancel the process You can do the following to resolve the conflicts e None Indicates that no action is taken on the conflict and the process is canceled e Overwrite Indicates that the folder job with the conflict is overwritten by the new change in the
278. owing table describes the General parameters for a File Watcher job Defines the type of job that determines which fields are exposed in a job definition The value of the job type is usually based on the platform for the job run J obs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as post processing actions Value File Watcher Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow Enables you to run jobs of job types other than Dummy as dummy jobs File Watcher l Defines the following attributes Attributes Details Path Mode Owner Min detected size Interval between file searches Interval between filesize comparison iterations Number of iterations Monitor file size and file age when wildcard is used Time limit for the process Starting time for detecting files Absolute stop time Maximal file age Minimal file age Save For more information about the ctmfw utility see ctmfw File Watcher utility Defines the path of the file to be detected The file name can include wildcard character to represent any number of characters including no characters or to represent any one character 102 Control M Wor
279. page 274 Click Next The Selection window appears 272 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 7 8 10 11 12 Select the jobs that you want to attach to this service by doing one of the following e Ifyou selected Service based on filter or Service per ODAT based on filter type or select the required values as described in Parameters click Advanced Filtering and go to step 8 e If you selected Service per SMART Folder or Service per job type or select the required values as described in Parameters and go to step 9 To add a filter which includes or excludes jobs do the following in the Including Terms or Excluding Terms area a In the Field column select a job property In the Operator column select the operator that you want to use In the Value column type a value for the job property Repeat step a through step c as necessary papp If you want to add another group of fields which when met can include more fields even if the other group of fields do not meet the conditions click E J obs that match the excluding filter are not included in the service even if they match the including filter The service only includes jobs that match the including filter but don t match the excluding filter Click Next The Orderable Parameters window appears Click E The Orderable Parameter dialog box appears Type or select the required values as described in Orderable Parameter fields on page
280. pecified date Click Apply The filtered definition entities appear in the list Managing versions of a job This procedure describes how to manage versions of a definition entity which enables you to view the properties compare parameters of definition entities and edit and restore a definition entity version gt 1 To manage versions of jobs From the Planning domain in the Tools menu select Versions The Version window appears Filter the definition entities that you want to view as described in Filtering definition entities on page 178 Select the definition entity that you want to view and click shew steers The Show History window appears Do one or more of the following e If you want to view the properties of a definition entity click Properties e If you want to compare currently monitored version with its current active version click Compare e Ifyou want to use a specific version click Use e Ifyou want to edit the definition entity version and then restore it click Edit and Use as described in Editing and Restoring a definition entity version on page 180 Click Close Comparing different versions of a job This procedure describes how to compare parameters of different versions of job definitions gt 1 To compare different versions of a job From the Planning domain in the Tools menu select Versions The Version window appears Select the two different versions of the job definitio
281. post processing actions Value z OS Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow Enables you to run jobs of job types other than Dummy as dummy jobs What Defines one or more parameters which determines what the job runs Determines whether the job runs as one of the following Member Defines that the job runs a JCL saved in the Member located in the Member Library Embedded J CL Defines that the job runs an embedded J CL and includes the lines of the J CL For information about verification of J CL code in a job definition see Verifying J CL code in a job definition on page 49 For more information about remote browsing to select a Member containing the J CL from the Member Library see Browse in a z OS job for the member that contains the JCL in a library on page 79 Member Library Indicates the location of the Member that contains the J CL started task procedure or Warning message Member Indicates the name of a member that contains one of the following in relation to the job to be executed JCLof the job Started task procedure Warning message Embedded J CL Defines a script exactly as it would b
282. r Control M Server for Distributed Systems only 2 Click The properties are enabled for definition Set Sub Folder parameters as described in Sub Folder parameters on page 148 Do the following a In the Scheduling tab select one or more of the Rule based Calendars and set the relevant scheduling parameters as described in Scheduling parameters on page 155 The Sub Folder inherits the selected Rule based Calendar scheduling and assigns the Time Settings b Define the prerequisites of the SMART Folder or Sub Folder as described in J ob prerequisites on page 166 c Define the actions of the SMART Folder or Sub Folder as described in Job actions on page 175 The folder is now updated 77 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Editing a folder This procedure describes how to edit a SMART Sub Folder or regular folder in a Workspace Before you begin Ensure you have successfully completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 gt 1 2 To edit a folder From the Workspace select a folder to edit In the Properties pane click The folder properties are now enabled for definition Do one of the following e To set regular folder parameters clear the SMART check box and see Regular folder parameters on page 143 If there is a Sub Folder you cannot clear the SMART check box e To set SMART folder parameters select the SMART check box and see SMART Folder parameters on page 144
283. r a job which enables you to release a control resource from the Active Control Resources list 172 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Before you begin Ensure that no jobs are using or requesting the resource gt To delete a control resource 1 In the Workspace select the job 2 Click 3 Inthe Properties pane select the Prerequisites tab 4 From the Control Resources list select the control resource to delete 5 Click 7 The control resource is deleted Quantitative resources A quantitative resource is resources that represents a measure that can be quantified such as percentage of CPU megabytes of storage or number of tape drives Control M verifies that a job is not submitted for execution unless the quantitative resources required by the job are available in the Active Quantitative Resources list EXAMPLE Control M has three tape drives available A job called BKP_Tallies requires one tape drive Whenever a job using TapeDr is submitted Control M drops the currently available quantity of the resource by the quantity the job uses until the job ends Control M only submit BKP_Tallies if there is at least one TapeDr available Quantitative resources are recorded in the Active Quantitative Resources list as described in Quantitative Resource management on page 267 The following procedures describe how to allocate copy and delete quantitative resources Allocating a quantitative resource on page
284. r is a tool that enables you to control manage and balance the workload on Control M resources and hosts in the following areas Limiting resources available to groups of jobs in production Routing groups of jobs to execute on specific resources Defining a resource s availability in the dynamic environment according to specific times You can divide any or all of the jobs in the Control M production into smaller groups of jobs which are called Workload Policies J obs are grouped together according to shared general attributes in their job definitions based on filters which associates any job with those attributes in production with the Workload Policy A Workload Policy enforces its rules on all associated jobs which can quickly affect large numbers of jobs processing definitions without manually changing the jobs definitions individually Workload Policy rules can limit the resources that the associated jobs can consume and specific times can be defined when these rules are enforced This prevents a Workload Policy from taking control of all available resources and preventing other jobs from running Critical jobs with quantitative resources bypass the Workload Policy resources limitation rule A Workload Policy can route associated jobs to a specific host This allows you to change the execution host defined for certain jobs in production and re route groups of jobs without affecting the jobs definitions The following procedur
285. r template into the Workspace If the Control M Server Selection dialog box appears select the Control M Server for the folder you are defining and click OK A folder is created the Folder Type is set to SMART and the folder properties appear in the right pane 76 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 3 Click The properties are enabled for definition 4 Set SMART Folder parameters as described in SMART Folder parameters on page 144 If you have a Site Standard applied the relevant parameters pattern parts are automatically populated 5 Do the following a Define scheduling criteria as described in Job scheduling on page 150 Jobs and Sub Folders can inherit scheduling settings b Define the dependencies of the SMART Folder or Sub Folder as described in Job prerequisites on page 166 c Define the actions of the SMART Folder or Sub Folder as described in Job actions on page 175 The folder is now updated Creating a Sub Folder This procedure describes how to create a Sub Folder in a Workspace Before you begin Ensure you have successfully completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 Ensure that you have created a SMART Folder as described in Creating a SMART Folder on page 76 gt To create a sub folder 1 From the Workspace tab New area drag and drop the folder template into the SMART Folder or an existing Sub Folder A Sub Folder is created and the Folder Type is set to Sub Folder fo
286. r the job Period Searches for jobs during one of the following periods All Last Week Last Month Last Year Between Dates Dates From Dates To Output Contains Defines a string to search for in job outputs You must define the J ob Name or Application fields to search this field Log Contains Defines a string to search for in the job logs You must define the J ob Name or Application fields to search this field Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Folder Defines the name of the folder In the Properties pane this parameter indicates the folder where the job belongs Library Defines the name of the library In z OS this parameter indicates where the job belongs 219 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Member Name File Name Indicates the name of the file that contains the job script or for z OS jobs the name of a member that contains one of the following in relation to the job to be executed The JCL of the job T
287. rd from the drop down list and set the value for the Business parameter The Site standard is set Enforcing validations This procedure describes how to enforce validations on a folder folders from the Folder tool which enables you to make sure all validation errors are fixed gt To enforce variables 1 From the Tools domain select Folders The Folders tab appears 2 Do one of the following w e If you want to enforce validation to one folder select the folder and click Set 257 Control M Workload Automation User Guide e If you want to enforce validation to multiple folders select all folders and click g The Set Site standard window appears 3 Do one of the following e f you selected one folder do the following a Select Enforce Validations if you want to enforce resolving validation errors that might occur while defining the folder Warnings appear as errors that cannot be ignored e f you selected more than one folder do the following b Select the Enforce Validations area check box and then select Enforce Validations if you want to enforce resolving validation errors that might occur while defining the folder Warnings appear as errors that cannot be ignored The enforce validation was assigned to the folder folders Templates Control M Workload Automation comes with sample job and SMART Folder templates for supported platforms which you can use as a basis for developing your own templates
288. rding to your needs For more information see Creating a Site standard on page 250 Click Sl The Site standard is modified with the new changes Duplicating a Site standard This procedure describes how to duplicate a Site standard which enables you to make a copy of an existing Site standard and edit its contents and save it as a new Site standard gt 1 To duplicate a Site standard From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Site standards The Site standards tab appears Select the Site standard you want to duplicate ak From the Edit group in the ribbon click Duplicate The duplicated Site standard is created and appears You can change the name and definitions of the Site standard as described in Creating a Site standard on page 250 254 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Deleting a Site standard This procedure describes how to delete a Site standard There might be active requests using the Site standard you want to delete gt To delete a Site standard 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Site standards The Site standards tab appears 2 Select the Site standard you want to delete x 3 From the Edit group click Delete The Site standard is deleted Folder management The Folder manager is a tool that enables you to view all folders defined in all environments The folders are automatically synchronized with Control M Server unless it is configured differently
289. red by the library specified for the Partition Data Set parameter 158 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Advanced Scheduling Defines a combination of scheduling options as described in Advanced Scheduling options on page 163 If the selected scheduling is equivalent to one of the above scheduling the scheduling is displayed as the simple scheduling More scheduling options For the full scheduling options see Scheduling parameters on page 155 Sub Folder You can select from a list of Folder RBCs that are defined in the parent SMART folder Job in a SMART Folder You can select from a list of Folder RBCs that are defined in the parent SMART folder to add to the RBC list and select Control M RBCs to be added to Excluded RBC list Month Days options The following table shows the Month Days options for scheduling Days of Month Defines the Month Days to order To limit the schedule or to specify specific months set the limitations or order on months as described in the following Limitations on page 163 Order on Months on page 163 Days from End of Month Defines the schedule according to the selected days from the end of the month For example if 3 is selected the symbol that is displayed is L3 Limitations on page 163 Order on Months on page 163 Days from Start End of Month Defines the schedule according to a combination of Days from the Start and Days from the End of Month Limita
290. rent library Enables you to select the current library for the job Type or select the library name or one of the special values from the drop down list Library List You can select a special value or type the required name space in the text field If a special value is specified it must be the only entry in the list Special values CURRENT J OBD SYSVAL NONE 116 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Environment You can view and modify the environment on which OS 400 jobs run Accounting code Defines the accounting code used by the submitted job when logging the system resources usage 15 character string use any characters or one of the Special Values from the drop down list NOTE If a value contains spaces or non alphanumeric characters enclose the value with single quotation marks Routing data Defines the routing data used to start the next routing step in the job 80 character string any characters or one of the special values from the drop down list NOTE If a value contains spaces or non alphanumeric characters enclose the value with single quotation marks Request data Defines the request data that is placed as the last entry in the job s message queue 3000 character string any characters or one of the special values from the drop down list Submitted for Defines the parent job name for the job A qualified job name in lt number gt lt user gt lt name gt format or the special val
291. rs AlertOnAbend and DownCreAlerts can automatically generate alerts when a job terminates with an Ended not OK status A communication breakdown for example between Control M Server and Control M EM generates an alert BMC Batch Impact Manager which can be used to relay messages of special importance Managing alerts on page 201 describes how to monitor alerts Managing alerts This procedure describes how to monitor alerts which enables you to view information about each alert change the alerts statuses to handled or unhandled and read and unread remove old alerts add notes to alerts and set additional options to alerts gt 1 To manage alerts From Monitoring Home select Alerts The Alerts window appears From the alerts list select an alert From the Alerts ribbon in the Actions group you can select one of the following e Read to mark an alert as read e Unread to mark an alert as unread e Handle to mark an alert as viewed and handled e Unhandle to mark an alert as unhandled In the Tools group select Always Monitor Alerts to constantly update the alerts list In the properties pane in the General section select the alert s severity from the Severity field In the properties pane in the Reported Information section add a note in the Notes field 201 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Service Monitor The Service Monitor is a tool that enables you to analyze services and locate
292. rver for Distributed Systems supports Sub Folders in SMART Folders SMART Defines whether a folder is SMART When the option is selected the folder has an extended set of folder definition parameters and can include Sub Folders The jobs and Sub Folders in the SMART Folder can inherit scheduling definitions from the SMART Folder that contains them To define a regular folder clear the check box and see Regular folder parameters on page 143 Folder Type Indicates whether the folder type is a regular folder a SMART folder or a Sub Folder Value SMART Folder Name Defines the name of the folder In the Properties pane this parameter indicates the folder where the job belongs Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow 144 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Folder Library Defines the name of the library that contains the job s folder Only z OS folders Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Order Method Defines the method for ordering the entity as one of the following Automatic Daily When set to Automatic at the same time each day known as New Day time each Control M Server runs a procedure called New Day This procedure performs a number of tasks including scheduling the day s job
293. s This procedure describes how to analyze a problematic job This enables you to identify the jobs in a service that are not running on time and therefore impact the service You can locate the jobs and view them ina Business Service Analysis Viewpoint gt To analyze problematic jobs 1 In Monitoring Home select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears 2 In a Service Monitor tab select a service The service analysis information appears on the right pane 3 To identify problematic jobs select the Problematic J obs tab The problematic jobs appear as described in Problematic J obs parameters on page 213 4 To identify problematic jobs with information status select the Information Status check box a Select a row and click R The Problematic J obs window appears b Click the Problematic J obs tab For more information on problematic jobs see Problematic J obs parameters on page 213 5 To view the Remedy tickets related to the service do the following a Select a row and click a b In the Problematic J obs window click the Tickets tab The existing Remedy tickets appear 212 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Problematic J obs parameters The following table describes the Problematic J obs of the service Information Status Determines if jobs are displayed depending on the check box selection If you select the check mark then show jobs with information status Problematic J obs Sho
294. s and running maintenance and cleanup utilities The New Day procedures orders the folder or folder jobs None Manual Order The folder is not automatically ordered Specific User Daily dentifier used to assign the folder to a specific User Daily job The User Daily name is ordered at a specific time of the day For load balancing purposes the User Daily jobs are scheduled for different times throughout the day other than the New Day time User Daily name Defines User Daily jobs whose sole purpose is to order jobs Instead of directly scheduling production jobs the New Day procedure can schedule User Daily jobs and those User Daily jobs can schedule the production jobs Set User Daily Name when Order Method is set to Specific User Daily Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism More Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters Variables All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function You can add a variable as described in Adding a variable on page 80 145 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Additional Information An area in the Properties pane with information about Application Sub Application Created by not z OS folders Application Provides a logi
295. s how to troubleshoot connectivity which enables you to re establish connectivity between Control M EM server and the Control M Workload Automation client gt 1 To troubleshoot connectivity From the Tools domain in the Communication area select Connectivity Troubleshooting The Connectivity Troubleshooting dialog box appears Select one of the following Use Specific P Address Enables you to select an IP addresses from enabled network interfaces on the computer Use I P Address Matching Specific Mask Enables you to specify an IP mask This option is recommended when using VPN connections since the IP addresses might change dynamically This avoids the need of reconfiguring CORBA each time you reconnect For example at runtime the subnet mask 137 72 114 0 will prefer the IP address 137 72 114 142 to 192 168 241 3 In the configuration file the mask is set in the Preferl PMask parameter and the hostname_in_iorvalue is IP which is evaluated at runtime If this option is selected the IP characters appear in the Troubleshoot Connectivity window accidentally deleting them prevents the mask from being evaluated at runtime Use Virtual Hostname or IP Address Enables you to set a virtual hostname for example on a cluster machine a known hostname or a fixed IP address Use Default Sets the current default hostname or IP address in brackets In the CORBA configuration file the value of the ORBDottedDecimalAd
296. s menu select Archive Search The Archive Search window appears Do one of the following e To perform a quick search do the following a In the Search field type the name or part of the name of the Control M entities that contain the jobs in your search From the drop down list select the Control M entities that contain the jobs in your search From the J ob Status drop down list search for jobs that ended OK Not OK or both click 2s The archived jobs appear EXAMPLE You want to search for all jobs where Job Name and Application contain the number 5 In the Search field type 5 and from the drop down list select Application and Job Name e To perform an advanced search do the following e Click Advanced The Advanced Search window opens For each field type the required value as described in Advanced Search parameters on page 219 You can use and wild characters as described in Pattern matching strings on page 296 Click Search The archived jobs appear 218 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Advanced Search parameters The following table describes Advanced Search parameters that are used in Searching for archive data on page 218 in Control M Workload Automation and Searching for archive data in Control M Self Service Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and orde
297. s not affect the critical path calculation Request Workspace A request Workspace has the same functionalities as a regular Workspace except it is initiated by the Control M Workload Change Manager web user who in this case is the requester For Control M Workload Change Manager users a request workspace enables them to carry out the same actions that you normally carry out in a regular worskpace with additional request actions The request Workspace can be modified by you and the web user However this cannot be done simultaneously it depends on the request Workspace status For more information see Request statuses After you take ownership of a request as described in Taking ownership of a request on page 68 it is opened in a request Workspace You can carry out the same actions that are described in Workspaces on page 37 with the following additions 67 Control M Workload Automation User Guide e Return If a request requires more modifications on the web user end you can return the request as described in Returning a request on page 69 e Notes Other than the synopsis view and the details view in the properties pane you can view notes For more information see Notes on page 70 Request Workspace lifecycle The following are stages of a request Workspace lifecycle 2 1 A Control M Workload Change Manager web user creates a request for defining a new job flow or open an existing job flow After cre
298. s procedure describes how to filter definition entities which displays definitions on a specific date and time with a change type indicator since the specified date and time gt To filter definition entities 1 From the Planning domain in the Tools menu select Versions The Versions window appears 2 Do the following a From the Control M drop down list select a Control M Server where the definition entities are located b From the Folder drop down list select a folder that you want to display c If you want to filter for more specific criteria click Advanced Filter in the Additional Filter Criteria window define your specific criteria and click OK d In the Date field select a date e If you want to select the specific time in the Time field select the check box and enter a specific time f If you want to filter specific entities based on the changes use the Change Type buttons to select one or more of the following o Unchanged Items Entities that have not been changed since the specified date G o Modified I tems Entities that have been modified since the specified date including modifications which affect the inclusion or removal from the filtered list o 6 New Items Entities that were created after the specified date including items modified or deleted since the specified date 178 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 3 o Q Deleted Items Entities that were deleted after the s
299. s that you want to remove from the Workspace Click Unload The selected jobs are removed from the Workspace You can also remove folders including SMART Folders and Sub Folders from the Workspace 47 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Restoring jobs folders This porcedure describes how to restore individual jobs folders which enables you to restore deleted defintions to the last saved version of that definition gt To restore jobs folders 1 In the Workspace from the Edit group click E Show Changes The list of changes appears in the Results Pane 2 Select thejob folder you want to restore and click La The job folder is restored to its last saved version Comparing jobs This procedure describes how to display a list of a difference between two jobs in a Workspace two different versions of the same job from the J ob History window and or compare a job with it s predecessor job This enables you to view the value of the fields that differ and to generate comparison reports in HTML text or XML format gt To compare jobs 1 Do one of the following J a In a Workspace select two jobs to compare and from the Analysis group select C0mPare b In the tree pane right click a job and select Compare with predecessor The Job Comparison window appears 2 To show rows with differences select Only show changes 3 To search for a string in the field values in field next to Qs type in the str
300. s the job can be scheduled for processing Rule based Calendars Enables you to define an AND OR relationship between the J ob scheduling definitions and all the Rule based Calendars and to select Rule based Calendars Rule based Calendars list You can also add RBCs to the RBCs list and Excluded RBCs list as described in Rule based Calendar and Excluded Rule based Calendar lists on page 151 Excluded Rule based Calendars You can also add RBCs to the RBCs list and Excluded RBCs list as list described in Rule based Calendar and Excluded Rule based Calendar lists on page 151 164 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Week Month Days with rules options The following table describes the Advanced Week Month Days with rules options In Advanced Scheduling options on page 163 all of the following rules can be selected for any of the days in the Advanced Month Days or in the Advanced Week Days calendars Order on Day Defines scheduling on the day Order on Day or the next working Defines scheduling either on the day or the next working day day gt Order on Day or the previous Defines the scheduling either on the day or the last working day closest working day lt Order Don t Order on day from the Defines scheduling by either ordering or not ordering a job from beginning of week month D D the beginning of the week month Order Don t Order on day from the Defines scheduling by either ordering or not ordering a
301. s the local data area You can add delete modify copy or move up or down by selecting the icon in the LDA field Start Defines the starting location of the LDA 1 to 1024 inclusive with a default of 1 Defines the length of the string in the LDA default actual length Decimal Defines the precision number of digits after the decimal point Value Defines the value of the LDA When Decimal is specified the value must be a numeric value with or without decimal point examples 167 1997 15 NOTE For all formats lt start gt lt length gt 1 must not exceed 1024 118 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Pre Post Commands The following table describes the pre submit commands and pre post commands parameters You can add delete move up or down copy or edit pre submit and pre and post commands NOTE Pre submit Pre commands post commands and pre statistics are only available for Program Script File and Command Pre submit commands Enables you to define a command before you submit the job A job can have any number of pre submit commands but the total number of variables for a job is limited All Pre submit commands are executed before the job is submitted to the OS 400 NOTE Pre submit commands are processed in the order they are displayed in the OS 400 Pre Post Commands dialog box Pre submit commands are executed as is There is no need for special single quote handling If a Pre submit comm
302. s you to update the J ob Priority for a What If event Skip Job rule on page 211 Enables you to Skip a J ob for a What If event Deleting a What If from a scenario This procedure describes how to delete a What If from a scenario which enables you to modify the simulate actions that can resolve service problems gt To delete a What If from a scenario 1 From the Monitoring domain access the Business Services Viewpoint as described in Accessing the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint on page 197 2 In the Business Services tab in the right pane click What I f Scenario The What If Scenarios icons appear 3 Select the What If to delete 4 Click 207 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 5 In the Delete confirmation message click Yes The selected What lf is deleted Time Frame rule The following table describes the Time Frame rules which affect the calculation of the all services depending on it by adjusting the job submission time frame Control M Name of the Control M whose jobs will be included in this exception definition Application Name of the application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Sub Application Name of the Sub Application whose jobs are included in this exception definition Name of the job that is included in this exception definition Name of the member name for z OS that is included in this exception definition Li organized b Name of the member li
303. scribes how to take ownership of workspace from another Control M EM user which allows you to perform all workspace actions such as adding and removing jobs and checking in and out a workspace gt To take Ownership of a workspace 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Workspaces 2 From the Workspace menu select the workspace that you want to take ownership over A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes You are now the owner of the workspace Renaming a workspace This procedure describes how to rename a workspace in the Workspace manager gt To rename a Workspace 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Workspaces 2 From the Workspace menu select the workspace that you want to rename Click Properties In the Name field type the new name of the workspace 239 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 5 Click OK The workspace with the new name appears in the Workspace table Deleting a workspace This procedure describes how to delete a workspace in the Workspace manager gt To delete a Workspace 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Workspaces 2 From the Workspace menu select the workspace that you want to delete A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes The workspace is deleted Filtering workspaces This procedure describes how to filter workspaces in the Workspace manager gt To filter workspaces 1 From the Tools domain in the
304. se that stores Workspaces which contain the job and folder definitions that have not yet been committed to the J ob Definition Database It enables you to continue working on your saved Workspace even if you close the Workspace You can also review and edit your colleague s Workspaces if you have proper authorization Filtering the loaded folders and jobs This procedure describes how to filter the folders and jobs you load to a Workspace gt 1 2 To filter the loaded folders and jobs In the Planning Home tab Load Folders and J obs area click Set the filter fields as described in Filter parameters on page 42 Click Filter The filtered entities appear in the Tree view 41 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Filter parameters The following table describes the filter parameters for opening a Workspace from the Planning domain or a Viewpoint from the Monitoring or Forecast domains Folder Defines the name of the folder In the Properties pane this parameter indicates the folder where the job belongs Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Member Name Indicates the name of the file that contains the job script or for z OS jobs the name of a member that contains one of t
305. sers creating change requests for job type File Transfer you can disable it in Site customizations The web user cannot create this form of job You can create several Site customizations however only one can be set as a default Site customization that is used by all web users If you choose to have several Site Customizations for different web users you will need to provide the web user with the Site customization that is relevant to them The following procedures describe how to create edit duplicate and delete a Site customization 243 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Creating a Site customization on page 244 Editing a Site customization on page 244 Duplicating a Site customization on page 245 Deleting a Site customization on page 245 For more information on job properties and job types see J ob definition on page 73 You must have full privileges to create Site customizations as described in Privileges Creating a Site customization This procedure describes how to create a Site customization which enables you to simplify job properties and restrict creation of job types for a Control M Workload Change Manager web user gt To create a Site customization 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Site customizations The Site customizations tab appears 2 From the Site customizations group in the ribbon click Mew The Site customization pane appears on the right 3 In th
306. service obs Completed Shows the priority level of the service Ordered By Shows the name of the person who ordered the service Shows the time the service was ordered 204 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Slack Time Shows the difference in time in the format HH MM between the due time of the service and its estimated end time For example if the service must end by 10 15 due time and its estimated end time is 10 05 its slack time is 10 minutes This information together with the service priority level can help you decide which problems are most urgent Last Status Update Shows the last time the status was updated Avg Completion Time Shows the time BMC Batch Impact Manager estimates that the service will complete This calculation is based on existing Control M average run time statistics or exceptions Problematic J obs Shows the ID number and the Job name of the problematic jobs If a job is associated with a Workload and the Workload has limitations defined for quantitative resources then a line is displayed in the Status pane indicating this submission criteria and its status Analyzing a service log This procedure describes how to analyze a service log gt To analyze a service log 1 In Monitoring Home select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears 2 In a Service Monitor tab select a service The service analysis information appears on the right pane 3 To find the service log select the Serv
307. simple or sub fields as defined not conditional Update where Conditional updates of simple fields or sub fields For example Update where Application starts with the letter A replace substring A with xyz updates application fields that start with the letter A and replaces every occurrence of the letter with the substring xyz Add Adds a new complex field into a list field For example Add In Condition Set Name like incondition1 Set Date like ODAT Add a new in condition to all jobs found according to the rest of the criteria and set the sub fields as defined Remove Removes a complex field from a list field For example Remove Notify Where To like EM Removes all notifies to destination EM from all jobs found according to the rest of the criteria 62 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Filter operators The following table describes the Filter operators like Enhances regular expressions supported It is supported by the like operator in all other windows for example viewpoint collection definition and alert filter not like The opposite of like is exactly The field value is equal to the value provided exact match no wildcards or regular expressions is not exactly The field value is not equal to the value provided lt or lt or gt or gt Used for numeric or lexicographic comparison starts with The field value starts with the value provided Pattern matching r
308. sing quantitative resources The information is provided by Control M Batch Impact Manager and you can analyze further as described in Analyzing active jobs on page 184 or intervene as described in Intervention actions on page 189 4 To simulate a potential change click Add What if and select an option as described in What If scenario options on page 207 The effect of the What if scenario appears automatically in the Business Service Analysis Viewpoint as described in Adding a What if event on page 206 5 Inthe Projections lt ob name gt window click Close The Projection is complete and you can apply the changes to the active jobs if the changes enabled the simulated jobs to end OK and the services to complete on time 200 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Alerts Monitor You can monitor your production environment by using monitor alerts An alert is a message that indicates that a problem or exception has occurred for a job or SMART Folder Alerts can originate from any of the following You can only view alerts for the jobs and SMART Folders that you are authorized to view The Alerts Monitor enables you to manage and monitor alerts and indicate each alert s status severity and add notes to alerts Notification facility A job or SMART Folder processing definition can include instructions in the Notify parameter to send a message to the Alerts window J obs ending not OK Two system paramete
309. sults appear in another tab 220 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Comparing archived jobs This procedure describes how to compare what was modified added or removed between two archived jobs job log and output gt To compare archived jobs 1 From the History domain in the Tools menu select Archive Search The Archive Search window appears Perform a search as described in Searching for archive data on page 218 Select two jobs that you want to compare From the Workload Archiving menu click Compare and select one of the following e Log e Output The Compare window appears highlighting the differences between the two jobs Exporting archived data This procedure describes how to export archive search results that appear in Control M Workload Automation to a csv file The exported data shows what appears in the table in the Archive window It does not contain the contents of the job log and output gt To export archived data 1 From the History domain in the Tools menu select Archive Search The Archive Search window appears Perform a search as described in Searching for archive data on page 218 From the Workload Archiving menu click Export Browse to a location where you want to save the csv file ao PF O N Click Save The archived data is exported to the csv file Saving archive data This procedure describes how to save job log and output archived data to a text file By default the d
310. t the job runs a command and includes the Command ine TACL Script Defines the name of the TACL file Volume Subvolume Defines the Volume and sub volume where the TACL script or Program resides Overrriding volume Defines the Volume and sub volume where the overriding TACL script or Program resides Specifies a valid device name 137 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Specifies the CPU number 0 15 in which the process runs on Specifies the priority in which the process runs under Assign on page 140 Enables you to assign job environmental attributes such as name and other attributes for example access mode and exclusion mode Define on page 141 Enables you to set environmental variables for your applications Params on page Enables you to set the name and value of your program to use these parameters 141 when creating a job Input File Specifies the full name of the input file Output file Specifies the full filename of the output file which is overwritten if it exists already Skip Validity Checks Determines whether validity checks are performed against any of the Tandem for this job related job attributes Bypass job skip Determines whether the job submits to the Tandem operating system Instead the execution job completes OK and for the job a dummy OUTPUT is created This process should Determines whether the job creates in a nowait manner This means the parent be created in a no process do
311. t to kill 3 From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Kill A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The job is killed Setting a job to OK This procedure describes how to set a job to end OK which overrides any defined scheduling criteria and sends the job to the active job environment 193 Control M Workload Automation User Guide o n gt Vv To set a job to OK Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 Select the job you want to set as OK From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Set to OK A confirmation message appears Click Yes The job is set to OK Confirming a job This procedure describes how to confirm a job that is waiting for confirmation which enables the job to continue running If the job is not defined to request user confirmation you do not need to do this procedure gt 1 2 3 To confirm a job Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 Select the job you want to confirm From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Confirm A confirmation message appears Click Yes The job is confirmed Reactivating a job Thia procedure describes how to reactivate a job which enables you to reactivate post processing for the selected job gt 1 2 3 To reactivate a job Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 Select the job you want to reactivate From the Viewpoint
312. tab in the Job group click React A confirmation message appears Click Yes The job is reactivated Deleting a job This procedure describes how to delete a job which enables you to change the job status to deleted gt To delete a job 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 194 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 2 Select the job you want to delete 3 From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Delete A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The job is deleted Recovering a job This procedure describes how to recover a job that still appears in the Active J obs database gt To recover a job 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the job you want to recover From the Viewpoint tab in the J ob group click Undelete A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes The job s status is changed and is no longer a deleted job Activating external programs This procedure describes how to activate external programs which enables you to you to insert job processing parameters from a Control M job or folder into a command line used to activate a third party program Before you begin Ensure that you have defined an external program as described in External Programs settings on page 32 gt To activate external programs 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the jo
313. tatistics definition In the Description field describe the purpose of the Periodic Statistics definition In the Period Type area select Statistics collected according to periods in the calendar In the Calendar field s in the Calendar and Control M columns select a defined calendar and Control M Server respectively In the J ob Filter area filter for the jobs that you want to collect statistics Click Save The Statistics definition appears in the Periodic Statistics manager Arrange the Periodic Statistics definitions in order of precedence so that if a job is included in two or more Periodic Statistics definitions the definition with the greater precedence higher up on the list is applied to the job A statistics calendar that is defined in an z OS job takes precedence over a Periodic Calendar that is related to the job through the Periodic Statistics Manager To load the Periodic Statistics definition before the New Day time in all Control M EM Gateway servers do the following a In the CCM in the EM components select the Gateway component b Send the LOAD_PERIODIC_STAT def command as described in Sending commands to Control M EM server components c Repeat Steps 10a and 10b for each Gateway component 289 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Generating Dynamic Periodic Statistics This procedure describes how to generate dynamic statistics for a Dynamic Period which enables you to collect run time stat
314. tatus on page 293 see Communication management on page 291 or contact your Administrator Logging in to Control M Workload Automation This procedure describes how to log in to Control M Workload Automation gt To log in 1 From your desktop select the Control M Workload Automation icon 2 Type your user name and password 3 Set the Server and Environment fields as described in Login Profile selection parameters on page 10 4 Ifthe Change Password field appears your password is about to expire Type your new password and then confirm it 5 Click Log In You are now logged in to Workload Automation Planning domain You can define jobs as described in Job definition on page 73 Creating a login profile This procedure enables you to switch between environments without having to reconfigure the hosts ports and server names and to configure the application to automatically detect the first available server gt To create a login profile 1 Inthe Control M Workload Automation login screen select Environment 2 Click E 3 In the Choose Server dialog box set the parameters as described in Login Profile selection parameters on page 10 4 Click OK The login profile is created and is selected in the login screen To log in see Logging in to Control M Workload Automation on page 8 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Editing a login profile This procedure enables you to configure your environm
315. ted jobs To skip a job with a validation error do the following a In the Results grid area click Validate b In the Validity Checks dialog box double click a validation error The Properties pane appears and the invalid field value is highlighted c Enter the correct value and click Save and Close To rollback updates do the following a Select the jobs in the Results grid area that you want to rollback b Click Rollback Updates 3 To highlight a job in Control M Workload Automation Ensure that the Select in View toggle button appears pressed Select the job in the Results tab that you want to highlight You can then view it highlighted in the Flow diagram Gantt view or List view 61 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Find and update job and folder actions The following table describes the find and update job and folder actions Find Evaluate simple fields such as Job Name and Application according to the find operator and find value selected For example Find Control M like ABC Find any Specifies list fields such as In Conditions and Notify and updates or evaluates as specified in the sub expressions of this complex expression Example 1 Find any Control Resource matches to any job that has at least one control resource defined Example 2 Find any Control Resource where Name like C D matches to any job that contains at least one control resource that starts with the letter C or D Update
316. ter your collection in the Filter section Filter Determines which jobs are displayed in the Viewpoint You can use Filtering for managing by exception For example you can display those jobs that Ended Not OK and jobs in a Wait status Although they do reduce system overhead filters reduce screen clutter enabling you to focus on jobs that really require monitoring Each Viewpoint has an associated Global filter but when a Viewpoint is displayed you can select a different Global filter to alter which jobs are displayed in the current Viewpoint s session After Global filters are defined they are available site wide Control M Workload Automation includes a set of predefined Viewpoints but you can define your own Viewpoints The following procedures describe how to create delete and copy a viewpoint Creating a Viewpoint on page 241 Deleting a Viewpoint on page 243 Copying a Viewpoint on page 243 Creating a Viewpoint This procedure describes how to create a Viewpoint which enables you to determine which jobs are selected and loaded into memory how the jobs are filtered and the hierarchy that is used to display those jobs gt To create a Viewpoint 1 From the Tools Domain select Viewpoint Manager The Viewpoint Manager appears 2 Click F A new Viewpoint is added and appears in the Properties pane Type a Name for the Viewpoint Type a description for the Viewpoint optional In the Hierarchy section do the
317. termines whether Workload Policies are synchronized with Control M Server Connectivity problems Control M Workload Automation uses a callback connection method for several actions such as Upload Folder and Open Viewpoint Control M EM uses a single XML CORBA configuration file called config xml that defines CORBA configuration data for all CORBA components clients and servers included During installation the file is configured with default values for the components Sometimes when the client machine has more than one IP address the default configuration does not provide optimum performance resulting in a failure If the callback connection fails during login the Connectivity Failure window appears warning you about the connectivity failure If you ignore this warning you might not be able to open a Viewpoint or upload a folder from the Control M EM server The Connectivity Failure window indicates that the Control M EM server is not connected to the Control M Workload Automation client and enables you to resolve the problem automatically or manually 293 Control M Workload Automation User Guide During the automatic resolution all available IP addresses are scanned the best IP address with the shortest response time is identified and the CORBA configuration file is modified accordingly To re establish connectivity see Troubleshooting connectivity on page 294 Troubleshooting connectivity This procedure describe
318. th Service for BAC and Service for BAT for the two generated services Do one or more of the following e To enable Control M Self Service users to order the generated services select the Orderable checkbox This option is only enabled if you selected Generate service per SMART Folder or Generate service per job in the Grouping window and the Active checkbox is not selected in the General window e To automatically add orderable parameters to the generated orderable services select the Add automatically orderable parameters to each service The generated parameters are taken from the Variables of a service s SMART Folder or job definition This option is only enabled if the Orderable checkbox is selected e To generate a separate service instance for each ODAT select Service Instance Per ODAT This option is only enabled if you selected Group jobs to services according to in the Grouping window Do one of the following e If the Active checkbox in the General window is not selected and you want to manually create service definitions from the service rule see Generating services from a rule on page 280 e If the Active checkbox in the General window is selected and you want to automatically create service definitions from the service rule click Finish The service definitions are automatically created When a job that belongs to a service rule enters Active J obs the service appears in Control M Self Service Services that
319. th the data from Control M Server Downloading the data populates Control M EM version 8 0 00 with the corrections that you performed manually in Control M Server as outlined in the Readiness report messages enables you to control jobs in the Control M EM Active J obs for example a request for job order or rerun However if the folders in Control M Server are not fully synchronized with those in Control M EM that is there are jobs that reside only on one side or corresponding jobs on both sides that are not identical the download operation overwrites the definitions in Control M EM with those from Control M Server gt To download the Control M Server data to Control M EM 1 From the Tools domain select Folder Manager The Folder Manager appears 2 Select all folders and click Download A confirmation message appears 3 Click OK You can also set synchronization levels as described in Configuring Control M Server synchronization Ordering a folder This procedure describes how to order a folder which executes all the jobs in the folder You need to manually order a folder if the Order Method is set to None gt To order a folder 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Folders The Folder manager appears 2 Select the folder that you want to order and click Order The Order dialog box appears Select one or more parameters as described in Order parameters on page 55 4 Click Order The progress of the
320. that is defined in an z OS job takes precedence over a Periodic Calendar that is related to the job through the Periodic Statistics Manager 10 To load the Periodic Statistics definition before the New Day time in all Control M EM Gateway servers do the following a Inthe CCM in the EM components select the Gateway component b Send the LOAD_PERIODIC_STAT def command as described in Sending commands to Control M EM server components c Repeat Steps 10a and 10b for each Gateway component 288 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 11 To generate the dynamic periodic statistics create the associated condition as described in Generating Dynamic Periodic Statistics on page 290 Creating a Periodic Calendar Statistics definition This procedure describes how to create a Periodic Calendar Statistics definition which enables you to collect run time statistics based on periods defines in one specific periodic calendar Before You Begin gt oo FF amp N 10 Successful completion of Creating a periodic calendar on page 263 Statistics collected according to periods in the calendar only To create a Periodic Calendar Statistics definition From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Periodic Statistics The Periodic Statistics manager appears From the Periodic Statistics menu select New The Periodic Statistics definition appears on the right In the Name field type the name of the Periodic S
321. the platform for the job run J obs defined as Dummy provide instructions for Control M such as post processing actions Job Name Defines the name of the job processing definition and appears in the job definition and tracking displays and enables you to identify the job and order the job Description Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow What What to run Runstream Indicates that the job executes an existing operating system runstream Embedded Script ndicates that the job executes the run stream embedded within the Control M job definition Command Indicates that the job executes an operating system command line Embedded Script Defines a script exactly as it would be specified in a terminal for the specific computer and is part of the job definition Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Account ID Optional Specifies the desired account ID to be set on the runcard of the job Qualifier Mandatory Indicates the qualifier name of the job runstream location Mandatory Specifies the file name of the job runstream location Cycle Optional Defines the cycle number of the file Default 1 Element Optional Specifies the element name within the file which contains the job runstream location 106 Con
322. the Description field describe details about the calendar e Inthe Relative area select alternate scheduling dates for the specified dates that are not scheduled in a calendar as follows Contro M for z OS only o Ifyou want the job to run after the scheduled date click o If you want the job run before the scheduled date click o Ifyou want to clear relative dates click For specified dates that are scheduled in the calendar the scheduled dates remains You can use Relative calendars to combine calendars through the Control M OABLCAL utility For more information see the Control M for z OS User Guide Do one of the following e Inthe calendar select the days that you want the job to run e Select Recurrence and do the following a Select the days of the month and or the days of the week that you want the job to run b From the Apply on drop down list select the years that you want the selected month days and week days applied to c Click OK Click OK The calendar is created and appears in the calendar table If you want to make the calendar available for scheduling select the calendar and click Check in The calendar synchronizes in the Definitions database If your synchronization setting is set to No Synchronization see Configuring Control M Server synchronization you can upload the calendar to Control M Server by clicking Upload drop down list and selecting Upload to upload calendar to Control M S
323. the Tools domain in Control M Workload Automation Ribbon Displays menus that enable you work in the domain find the tools related to the domain customize the view and analyze your flow Domain selector _ Lists the various functional areas in the application where you can plan monitor view history forecast use tools and view Newsfeed 20 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Newsfeed domain The following figure shows the layout of the Newsfeed domain which highlights the different Newsfeed channels Neat tool for some mainframe analytics 7 16 2013 4 45 PM B BMC ControlM on Twitter 21 Who moved my cheese and who changed the job definition amp why join the audit and annotation webinar next w 7 13 2013 12 04 AM BMC on YouTube 25 Check out our next Connect with Control M session Audit amp Automation Next Wednesday July 17 https comm 7 9 2013 6 25 PM Control M Self Service Mobile App has been updated Check it out http itunes apple com us app bme controb 7 8 2013 9 47 PM Hi Guys 7 6 2013 8 51 PM New BMCControlM course from BMC Education The BMC ControbM Workload Automation 8 0 Scheduling course 6 24 2013 5 17 PM Photo On Alf s Zoo Workload Automation with Joe Goldberg Check it out https communities bme com comm 6 21 2013 9 16 PM It s not too late to register Connect with ControkM Webinar Version 8 0 Enhancements June 27 webinar in German S
324. the condition In the Order Date area select No Date Click Save The condition appears in the Active Conditions list and the dynamic statistics are gathered for all the jobs that start running that are included in the defined filter from Creating a Dynamic Periodic Statistics definition on page 288 To view the statistics in a job that is included in the filter see Analyzing active jobs on page 184 To stop generating the dynamic statistics remove the Condition from the Active Conditions list as described in Deleting a condition on page 269 For more information about rules for adding and removing conditions see Forecast BIM rules on page 228 and Editing a Service Assumption on page 215 For more information on global conditions see Global Conditions Prefixes on page 269 and Connecting jobs from different Control M Servers on page 170 290 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Copying a Periodic Statistics definition This procedure describes how to copy a Periodic Statistics definition which enables you to create another Periodic Statistics definition without having to type and select the required criteria multiple times gt 1 To copy a Periodic Statistics definition From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Periodic Statistics The Periodic Statistics manager appears Select the Periodic Statistics definition that you want to copy From the Periodic Statistics menu select Duplicate Th
325. the job even if Control M is in Quiesce mode either as a result of QUIESTIME or QUIESQRES commands Run as Dummy Job Runs the job as a Dummy job when the pre submission criteria of the job are satisfied and the job status should change to ENDED OK and only the job post processing actions in the job should be performed 192 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Post processing Runs the job without performing any of the job post processing actions including On Do actions Out conditions Notifications OK NOTOK and Output handling When ordering ignoring scheduling criteria a job that is set with Post Processing bypass the job will End OK and will not perform the post processing actions Restarting a job This procedure describes how to restart a Control M for z OS job from a specific state gt To restart a job 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the Control M for z OS job you want to restart 3 From the Viewpoint tab in the Job group click Restart The Restart job dialog box appears 4 For each field type the required value as described in Restart job parameters Click Yes The Control M for z OS job restarts Killing a job This procedure describes how to terminate a job which cancels a job from running in the middle of the execution gt To kill a job 1 Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 2 Select the job you wan
326. the job status which is attached as an external job Any job s status Active Job queue Output queue Duplicate job option Enables you to select an option if more than one external job matches the external job attributes job name owner and job status Error Default Do not attach the external job The Control M job ends NOTOK with an appropriate error message First job Take the first job time based that matches the external job attributes Last job Take the last job time based that matches the external job attributes 128 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Release job Move to Job Queue Library Change job command Set Accounting code MSGW Auto Reply Profile MSGWPRF Spooled files handling profile RPTDSTPRF Bypass job Skip validity checks for this job Enables you to release the job form JOBQ when the job is attached to Control M If the job could not be released a message is logged in the Control M Agent log However the job is attached to Control M Defines the name of a job queue to move the job when the job is attached to Control M Click Load and select a job queue name from the generated list If the job could not be moved a message is logged in the Control M Agent log However the job is attached to Control M Defines the name of the library where the job queue resides Click Load and select a library name from the generated list Specifies any OS 400 CHG OB command key
327. ther the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL Doc Path For a z OS job Doc Library defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is saved File Path For non z OS jobs File Path indicates the location of the file that contains the script For z OS jobs Member Library indicates the location of the Member that contains the J CL started task procedure or Warning message 109 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 0S 400 Full parameters The following table describes the OS 400 Full parameters Program on page 112 Script File on page 124 Multiple Commands on page 126 Commands on page 126 Subsystem on page 127 Job Description on page 130 Virtual Terminal on page 131 Enables the job to execute the program specified Program that resides in Library or Path on the Special environment Enables the job to execute the Script file specified in Script file that resides in Library or Path in the Special Environment CTMCL the Control M Script interpreter processes the commands in the script Enables you to execute multiple commands in a single job using the Control M Command line interpreter It enables you to create jobs with multiple commands eliminating the need to use pre and post commands It also enables an easier conversion from the ROBOT scheduler Specifies the co
328. this table Examples To specify type If you specify then has the meaning of period and not the same meaning as Use to escape only where is the first character Copying a Workload Policy Definition This procedure describes how to copy a Workload Policy Definition which enables you to create another Workload Policy Definition without having to type and select the required criteria multiple times 283 Control M Workload Automation User Guide To copy a Workload Policy Definition From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Workload Policy Definition The Workload Policy Definition manager appears From the Workload Policy Management menu select Duplicate The Workload Policy Definition properties pane appears on the right In the Name field type a new for the Workload Policy Definition Edit the Workload Policy Definition as needed Click Apply Changes A confirmation message appears Click Yes The Workload Policy definition is now saved in the Control M EM database Deleting a Workload Policy Definition This procedure describes how to delete a Workload Policy Definition After you delete the definition the jobs that were associated to it run according to their individual definitions gt 1 To delete a Workload Policy Definition From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Workload Policy Definition The Workload Policy Definition manager appears Se
329. tions on page 163 Order on Months on page 163 All days except days from end of Defines the schedule to include all days except days from the end month of the month Ln Limitations on page 163 Order on Months on page 163 159 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Week Days options The following table shows the Week Days options for scheduling Week Days The schedule is according to selected days Order on Months Defines the Month to order Based on Calendar The following table describes the Based on Calendar options for scheduling Calendar Days Defines the calendar days for scheduling Calendar The job is scheduled according to the scheduling criteria of the selected Calendar as described in Calendar management on page 262 Exceptions on page 162 Schedules or excludes a job ona specific Month Day Limitations on page 163 Limits the scheduling criteria to specific Days of the Week that are selected Order on Months on page 163 Determines the months that can be scheduled for processing Month Days Dependant on Defines the days of the Month for scheduling l caendan Calendar The job is scheduled according to the scheduling criteria of the selected Calendar as described in Calendar management on page 262 Intersect with Month Days The working days in the month are selected when a job should run Exceptions on page 162 Schedules or excludes a job on a specific Month Day
330. tistics definition This procedure describes how to create a Dynamic Periodic Statistics definition which enables you to collect run time statistics for a group of jobs during a period of time that begins when the associated condition is added to Active Conditions list and ends when the condition is removed from Active Conditions list gt To create a Dynamic Periodic Statistics definition 1 From the Tools domain in the Planning area select Periodic Statistics The Periodic Statistics manager appears 2 From the Periodic Statistics menu select New The Periodic Statistics definition appears on the right In the Name field type the name of the Periodic Statistics definition In the Description field describe the purpose of the Periodic Statistics definition In the Period Type area select Statistics collected according to a period defined by a condition prefix 6 In the Condition Prefix field type a meaningful name for the Condition Prefix The Condition Prefix will be used when you create the associated condition In the J ob Filter area filter for the jobs that you want to collect statistics Click Save The Statistics definition appears in the Periodic Statistics manager 9 Arrange the Periodic Statistics definitions in order of precedence so that if a job is included in two or more Periodic Statistics definitions the definition with the greater precedence higher up on the list is applied to the job A statistics calendar
331. tive Quantitative Resources list Control M has three tape drives available A job called BKP_Tallies requires one tape drive Whenever a job using TapeDr is submitted Control M drops the currently available quantity of the resource by the quantity the job uses until the job ends Control M only submits BKP_Tallies if there is at least one TapeDr available The Quantitative Resource management tool enables you to create quantitative resources in a logical table If the maximum usage of the resource is exceeded other jobs with the same defined resource will not run concurrently The following procedures describe how to create and delete Active quantitative resources in the Quantitative Resources management tool Creating a quantitative resource on page 267 Deleting a quantitative resource on page 174 Creating a quantitative resource This procedure describes how to create an active quantitative resource which is then used to allocate resources according to the job definition gt To create a quantitative resource 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Quantitative Resources The Quantitative Resources management tool appears 2 From the Quantitative Resources menu select Add Resource A new quantitative resource properties pane appears on the right 3 Do the following a In the Resource Name field type a name for the resource b From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Ser
332. tive jobs perform actions view alerts or analyze business services as described in the following topics Viewpoints on page 181 Enables you to view the Active J obs in the Monitoring domain To display only those jobs and job flows of interest you can dynamically customize Viewpoints as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 Alerts Monitor on page 201 Enables you to monitor your production environment by using Alert Monitor An alert is a message that indicates that a problem or exception has occurred for a job Service Monitor on page 202 Enables you analyze business services and locate and resolve problematic jobs Business Service Analysis Viewpoint Enables you to focus on one particular service All the jobs of the service are displayed in the Viewpoint together with additional information related to the BMC Batch Impact analysis For more information about navigating in the Monitoring domain see Monitoring domain on page 14 For more information about Control M Workload Automation see Getting Started Viewpoints Viewpoints are constantly updated and show in real time the execution status of the batch production Control M provides a set of predefined Viewpoints You can define other Viewpoints according to need as described in Viewpoint management on page 241 After you have set up you Viewpoint on page 182 you can do the following Analyze active jobs on page 183 Enables you to a
333. tive octal number to be placed in T2 of the condition word of the run being scheduled Indicates the estimated number of printed pages expected as output from the run 108 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Run time Indicates the estimated run time in standard units of processing SUP This is roughly equivalent to minutes or use a leading S to set seconds Deadline Indicates the elapsed time since run submission or the time of day Dhhmm when a run must complete based on a 24 hour clock Cards Indicates the estimated number of cards expected as output from the run Start time Indicates the earliest time when a run can be processed The format of this value is the same as for DEADLINE Host Group Defines the name of a Control M Agent computer remote host computer or host group where the job is submitted Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily have to run at the same time Sub Application Indicates the name of the Sub Application where the job belongs logically It is a sub category of the Application parameter For example the Application is Finances and the Sub Application is Payroll Created by Indicates the Control M EM user who defined the job Defines whe
334. to create and delete conditions in the Condition manager Creating a condition on page 268 Deleting a condition on page 269 Creating a condition This procedure describes how to create a condition in the Condition manager gt To create a condition 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Conditions The Condition manager appears 2 From the Conditions menu select Add Condition A new condition properties pane appears in the Properties pane 3 Do the following a In the Condition Name field type a name for the condition b From the Control M Server drop down list select the Control M Server that hosts the condition c In the Order Date area select one of the following order options o Date Selector The condition is created in the Active Conditions with the date selected o Order Date The condition is created in the Active Conditions with the current order date of the Control M Server 268 Control M Workload Automation User Guide o No Date The condition is created with no specific date 4 Click Save The condition appears in the Active Conditions list Deleting a condition This procedure describes how to delete a condition in the Condition manager After the condition is deleted all jobs that require the condition cannot run gt To delete a condition 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Conditions The Condition manager appears 2 From the Conditi
335. trol M Workload Automation scheduler modifying the folder with that Site standard will have to comply with the Folder Name rule you defined If they do not comply with the rule a warning error appears They can ignore or fix the warning error depending on the enforcement policy you set as described in Enforcing validations on page 257 For more information on how to define Control M folder job parameters see Creating a Site standard on page 250 Business parameters In addition to the Control M folder job parameters rules and restrictions you can define additional parameters that carry a specific meaning to your organization 247 Control M Workload Automation User Guide In your organization you define your Job Name with a prefix of department ID Your J ob Name consists of business parameter Depl D followed by free text Name Job Sub Folder Name x Default Value Possible Values Pattern Parts Pattern Parts x 4 x Type ata Business Para Department ID Department ID You can create a Business parameter named Department ID and apply the desired rules and restrictions like possible values pattern parts length etc as described in Site standards rules editor parameters on page 253 After creating the business parameter you can use it in a Control M folder job parameter in this case in Job Name You can also reuse other business parameters you defin
336. trol M Workload Automation User Guide Optional Indicates the version of the element Overriding Qualifier Optional Specifies a temporarily modified qualifier name of the job runstream location without changing the original Command line Mandatory Indicates the command line entry if this is a Command type of job Pre command Optional Determines the command line instruction to be executed before the specified command line Post command Optional Determines the command line instruction to be executed after the specified command line Priority Optional Determines the job s 0S2200 processing priority Options Optional Specifies the options to be set with the START command Run ID Optional Indicates the desired run ID to be set on the runcard of the job Default order_ID run_Number Project ID Optional Defines the desired project ID to be set on the runcard of the job Do not use SYM and Indicates that an additional SYM and BRKPT will not be BRKPT in job wrapper added to the job s wrapper Checked There is no additional SYM or BKRPT redirection statements besides the ones contained by the job s J CL The SYSOUT will be written only if MULTIPLE_SYM is set to Y or Y ALL Equivalent to Printout data to include in SYSOUT is set to All job printouts The printouts can be retained or not retained See Multiple SYM options Cleared Default The job s wrapper will include BRKPT and SYM redirection to the queue of the user
337. ub Folder Sub Folder Folder Name Defines the name of the folder In the Properties pane this parameter indicates the folder where the job belongs Description From Forecast only Provides a description of the job in free text A well written description can help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business workflow Control M Server Defines the name of the Control M Server or Control M for z OS that processes the job Run as Identifies the user name with the authorization to execute the job This parameter is used by the Control M security mechanism Parent Folder Defines the name of the folder that contains the job or Sub Folder Names of folders and Sub Folders may be up to 64 characters with the exception of Control M for z OS folders which may be up to 8 characters Folder names cannot contain the character SMART Folders in Control M for z OS can only contain jobs not Sub Folders More Defines an area of the Properties pane to click to define more parameters Variables All variables are identified by the prefix If is included in the value for a job processing parameter Control M assumes that it is referring to a variable or function You can add a variable as described in Adding a variable on page 80 Application Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs This parameter is used to supply a common descriptive name to a set of related job groups The jobs do not necessarily
338. ue from the drop down list Scheduling date Defines the date when the job is submitted to the job queue and is eligible to run Specify a date in the job s date format with or without the date separator or one of the special values from the drop down list Scheduling time Defines the time on the scheduled date when the job becomes eligible to run Time in hhmmss format or special value from the drop down list Job date Defines the date that is assigned to the job when it starts J ob date format Type the date or a special value from the drop down list Job switches Defines the first settings for a group of 8 job switches used with the job Any combination of Os and 1s to form an 8 digit string or the special value from the drop down list Allow display by WRKSBMJ OB Specifies whether the job being submitted is allowed to be shown on the Work with Submitted J obs panel Default selected Yes 117 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Allow multiple threads Defines whether or not the job is allowed to run with multiple user threads One of the special values from the drop down list System default Job Description Yes No Copy environment variables Specifies whether the environment variables from the submitting job are copied to the new job NOTE When this property is not set unchecked or set to No LDA is not set for the job and environment variables are not passed Default selected yes LDA Define
339. ules apply Special characters such as are not processed as literals unless there is a backslash DESCRIPTION Starts with abc Matches DESCRIPTION values abcd abc888 and abc The DESCRIPTION that starts with abc matches only DESCRIPTION values abc 999 abc ddd etc ends with The field value ends with the value provided Pattern matching rules apply contains The field value contains the substring exact or pattern provided Pattern matching rules apply doesn t contain The field value does not contain the substring exact or pattern provided Pattern matching rules apply is empty The field has no value NULL or empty string is not empty The field has ANY value 63 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Update operators The following table described the Update Operators for finding and updating jobs assign Assigns the value as is no functions place holders or regular expressions If the field contains several values a list field such as scheduling Dates field you can add or modify values in the list by providing comma separated values If only one value is specified only the first value in the list field is updated For example to add three scheduling dates to the list use Update Dates assign 0909 0807 0221 assign function You can use to specify complex assign function values Additionally the character is a special place holder of the previous field value or a
340. un time during weekends there is an advantage to collecting statistics for this job separately for work days and for weekend periods The average run times will be much more accurate for each period Dynamic Periodic Statistics on page 288 Enables you to collect run time statistics for a group of jobs based on a period of time that begins when the associated condition is added to the Active Conditions list and ends when the condition is removed from the Active Conditions list The statistics are gathered for the filtered jobs during the period The period is identified by the last character of the condition name which has Order Date set to No Date After you define Dynamic Periodic Statistics you can generate Dynamic Periodic Statistics on page 290 by creating the associated condition with the condition prefix adding a character to identify the period name setting the Order Date to Not Date and saving the condition If no conditions are defined the statistics are collected for a period without a condition When more than one condition exists the statistics will be collected for the highest condition first lower case letters then capital letters and then numbers J ob statistics are determined by the condition present when the job starts running If the average run time of a jobs today are not the same as usual because one computer instead of two are running the jobs This case is not associated with a period in the calendar There is
341. usiness parameters 1 Inthe Site standard click Advanced 2 In the Business parameters section click The rules editor pane appears on the right 3 Inthe Name field type a name for the Business parameter Select a name that has a business value to your organization 4 Define the rules as described in Site standards rules editor parameters on page 253 5 Click The business parameter rules are created Creating internal rules This procedure describes how to create internal rules For more information on internal rules functionality see Internal rules on page 248 Before you begin Ensure that you have completed Creating a Site standard on page 250 gt To create internal rules 1 Inthe Site standard click Advanced 2 Inthe Internal rules section click The rules editor pane appears on the right In the Name field type a name for the internal rule Define the rules as described in Site standards rules editor parameters on page 253 5 Click The internal rule is created Creating a condition format This procedure describes how to create a Condition Format which enables you to specify a default condition name format that is used by the Workload Change Manager web user and the Control M Workload Automation scheduler 251 Control M Workload Automation User Guide gt To create a condition format 1 Inthe Site standard click Condition Format The rules editor pane appears on the right
342. valid OS 400 Object name or one of the special values from the drop down list 133 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Current library Menu Bypass job Skip validity check for this job The current library of the signon process Up to 10 characters valid OS 400 Object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Defines the sign in program name Up to 10 characters valid 0S 400 Object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Defines the sign on menu Up to 10 characters valid OS 400 Object name or one of the special values from the drop down list Enables the job not to run The following message is generated Job was bypassed Enables you to skip validity checks for all fields 134 Control M Workload Automation User Guide OS 400 External The OS 400 External job enables you to monitor OS 400 jobs created in external applications When attached to Control M external jobs can be released and or moved to another J OBQ changed to set specific attributes for example RUNPTY or changed to a new accounting code You can access OS 400 External job from the job palette in the Planning domain or from the What to run field in OS 400 Full in the J ob Properties Pane in Control M Workload Automation For more details about O S 400 parameters see 0S 400 Full parameters on page 110 The following table describes the OS 400 External job and external subsystem parameters
343. ver that hosts the resource c In the Max field type the maximum quantity of this resource that can be used by jobs concurrently If the Max field 12 and J ob1 requires 4 Job2 requires 5 and Job3 requires 10 then Job1 and J ob2 can run together J ob3 cannot run concurrently with one of the other jobs 4 Click Save The resource appears in the Active Quantitative Resource list 267 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Deleting a quantitative resource This procedure describes how to delete an active quantitative resource in the Control Resources management tool After the resource is deleted all jobs that require the resource cannot run gt To delete a quantitative resource 1 From the Tools domain in the Production Control area select Quantitative Resources The Quantitative Resources management tool appears 2 From the Quantitative Resources menu select Delete Resource A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes The resource is deleted from the Active Quantitative Resource list Condition management The Condition manager is a tool that enables you to view all conditions that are in the active environment You can add conditions manually when a job depends on a condition that does not apply to other jobs and has not been added to the Condition manager previously For more information about conditions see In Conditions on page 167 and Out Conditions on page 175 The following procedures describe how
344. whether the type is File or URL For a file the description is located in a file located in a file path For a URL the Documentation is located in a URL address Defines whether the documentation for an OS job is in a file or URL See the following URL Defines the URL address where the documentation is located The format starts with http ftp or file File Specifies the file that contains the job script 93 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Doc Path For a z OS job Doc Library defines the name of the library where the Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job Doc Path defines the name of the file path where the Documentation is saved Doc File For a z OS job defines the name of the member where the job Documentation description is saved For a non z OS job the Doc File is the name of the file where the job Documentation is saved Priority Determines the order of job processing by Control M in the Active J obs database Critical Determines whether the job is a critical path job in Control M which ensures resources allocation order Not all parameters are relevant if a BIM service is defined for z OS services BIM Events The following tables describes When parameters for Action Details J ob failure on service One or more of the jobs in the critical service failed and caused a delay in the service A service is considered OK even if one of its jobs fails provided t
345. word and value that to set the job when the job is attached to Control M The following format is used Keywordl valuel Keywordn Valuen EXAMPLE RUNPTY 77 LOG 4 00 SECLVL LOGCLPGM NO If the job could not be changed a message is logged in the Control M Agent log However the job is attached to Control M Specifies the accounting code to set the job when the job is attached to Control M A maximum of 15 characters accounting code can be specified If the accounting code could not be set for the job a message is logged in the Control M Agent log However the job is attached to Control M Must be the name of an existing MSGW auto reply profile file that is located in the Agent Data directory Must be the name of an existing Spooled files handling profile file that is located in the Agent Data directory Enables the job not to run and the following message is generated Job was bypassed Enables you to skip validity checks for all fields 129 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Job Description Job Description enables a job to start a job description specified in Job Description that resides in Library and monitors the job until the job ends This action is similar to Autostart J ob Entry AJ E in a subsystem description The following table describes the Job Description parameters for an OS 400 job Library Defines the library name Up to 10 characters valid OS 400 Object name or one of t
346. ws the ID number and the Job name of the problematic jobs Service Status Details The following table describes the possible statuses of a service The batch service job is not yet problematic but not yet running Completed OK The batch service job completed on time Jobs related to this service were either not defined or not submitted available Service is Late Either a service did not complete before the time defined in the Must complete by field in the BMC Batch Impact Manager job or the service completed OK but the end time of the service exceeded its Due time Deadline is out of Forecast cannot identify the status since the service continues after forecast scope forecast end time Job ran too long The job ran longer than expected based on the expected time J ob finished too The job finished running earlier than the expected time quickly J ob Failure The job will not complete If a job is associated with a Workload Policy and the Workload Policy has limitations defined for quantitative resources then a line is displayed in the Status pane indicating this submission criteria and its status 213 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Updating a BIM service deadline This procedure describes how to update a BIM service deadline from the Service Monitor gt 1 To update a BIM service deadline In the Monitoring Home select Service Monitor The Service Monitor appears In a Service Monitor tab s
347. xisting one gt gt O NM gt To copy an Out Condition In the Workspace select the job Click In the properties pane select the Actions tab From the Out Conditions table select the Out Condition to copy Click ty The Out Condition is copied and appears in the Out Conditions table Editing an Out Condition This procedure describes how to edit an Out Condition for a job which enables you to modify the details for the Out Condition gt 1 2 To edit an Out Condition In the Workspace select the job Click 176 Control M Workload Automation User Guide 3 Inthe properties pane select the Actions tab 4 From the Out Conditions table select the Out Condition to edit 5 Click The Condition Details window appears 6 Define the required fields as described in Creating an Out Condition on page 175 The Out Condition is updated Deleting an Out Condition This procedure describes how to delete an Out Condition for a job which enables you to delete an Out Condition gt To delete an Out Condition 1 In the Workspace select the job 2 Click 3 Inthe properties pane select the Actions tab 4 From the Out Conditions table select the Out Condition to delete 5 Click 7 The Out Condition is deleted Creating Notifications and On Do Actions This procedure describes how to create Notifications and On Do Actions Before you begin You must have a Workspace with at least tw
348. you begin Ensure that you have authorization for browsing and updating jobs and folders in the Workspace For more information contact your Control M Administrator gt To take ownership of a colleague s Workspace 1 From the Planning domain click the i tab 2 In the Planning Home tab click Others Work 3 Select a Workspace and click Yes to the confirmation message The colleague s Workspace opens 4 In the Workspace tab Workspace group click ee You can now edit jobs and folders in the Workspace Checking out a Workspace This procedure describes how to check out a Workspace This enables you to edit job and folder definitions Before you begin Ensure that you have met the following requirements m Verify that you have completed Setting up a Workspace on page 39 If you have set up a new blank Workspace or if you opened a copy it is automatically checked out gt To check out a Workspace K Check Inthe Workspace click Out The Check out icon is disabled For more information about working in Workspaces see Workspaces on page 37 and Job definition on page 73 45 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Saving a Workspace This example describes how to save your changes in the Workspace It enables you to continue working on the job definitions even if you close the Workspace Before You Begin Ensure that you have met the following requirements m Verify that you have completed Setting up
349. zing a script on page 185 Select Log to view the job s event time code and message Select Belongs to to view what service and Workload Policy the job belongs For more information on services see Analyzing what service the job belongs to on page 187 Select Output to view the job s output as described in Analyzing Output of an active job on page 187 Select Statistics to view the latest statistics of the job s run times Select Documentation to view a job description that is saved in a defined location The Documentation area in the Properties pane includes information about where to find the description Viewing status summary This procedure describes how to view the status summary of jobs which enables you to view the summary of all jobs and folders Before you begin Open the Viewpoint as described in Setting up a Viewpoint on page 182 gt To view status summary From the Viewpoint select a level in the hierarchy such as a specific Control Application or status where the jobs and folders reside The Status Summary pie chart appears in the right pane For more information on job statuses see Active Job statuses on page 185 184 Control M Workload Automation User Guide Active J ob statuses This table lists the job statuses and their descriptions mp ended OK moe ended not OK me jobwaisng user O m fjor watnores m ioe wating wooo E E e e Analyzing a script This procedure descr

Control-M Workload Automation User Guide 8.0.00.700

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents